009 11298 R14.0 - Installation Procedure Manual

A Publication of
NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.

HILVERSUM, THE NETHERLANDS
Order No :
3522 009 11298
Date
September 2007
Great care has been taken to ensure that the information

contained in this handbook is accurate and complete.
Should any errors or omissions be discovered or should any users
wish to make suggestions for improving this handbook, they are
invited to send the relevant details to:
NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.
P.O. BOX 32
1200 JD HILVERSUM
THE NETHERLANDS
NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V. 2007.

All rights are reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part is
prohibited without the written consent of the copyright owner. All
brand names and product names in this document are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
PREFACE
This manual is valid for the SOPHO 2000 IPS telephone system.
In this manual the term NEAX 2000 IPS or NEAX PBX telephone system represents the
SOPHO 2000 IPS system.
This book might refer to products not included in the SOPHO portfolio.
Certain items in this manual do not apply to the European market.
CE Notice (European Union)
This equipment is intended to be used for connection to the telephone network according
to the following standards :
ISDN interfaces :
- ETS 300 011 (PRI)
- ETS 300 012 (BRI)
- ETS 300 402 (PRI & BRI)
- ETS 300 403 (PRI & BRI)
- TBR3 (BRI)
- TBR4 (PRI)
Analogue interfaces :
- ANSI/TIA/EIA-464-C (all interfaces)
- TBR15 (2-wire E&M)
- TBR17 (4-wire E&M)
- TBR21 (extension interface)
To take advantage of all features of this system and the connected equipment, the country
or network provider specific features should match the supported features of the IPS
system. For an overview of the supported features, refer to your local NEC Philips
representative or the support desk of NEC Philips Unified Solutions.
Hereby NEC Philips Unified Solutions declares that this product is in conformity with the
essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC.
A copy of the related Declaration of Conformity can be obtained via the address mentioned
on the inside cover.
Warning : This is a class A product.
In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
PRODUCT DISPOSAL INFORMATION

For countries in the European Union
The symbol depicted here has been affixed to your product in order to
inform you that electrical and electronic products should not be disposed
of as municipal waste.
Electrical and electronic products including the cables, plugs and accessories should be
disposed of separately in order to allow proper treatment, recovery and recycling. These
products should be taken to a designated facility where the best available treatment,
recovery and recycling techniques are available. Separate disposal has significant
advantages: valuable materials can be re-used and it prevents the dispersion of unwanted
substances into the municipal waste stream. This contributes to the protection of human
health and the environment.
Please be informed that a fine may be imposed for illegal disposal of electrical and
electronic products via the general municipal waste stream.
In order to facilitate separate disposal and environmentally sound recycling arrangements
have been made for local collection and recycling. In case your electrical and electronic
products need to be disposed of please refer to your supplier or the contractual
agreements that your company has made upon acquisition of these products.
At www.nec-philips.com/weee you can find information about separate disposal and
environmentally sound recycling.
For countries outside the European Union

Disposal of electrical and electronic products in countries outside the European Union
should be done in line with the local regulations. If no arrangement has been made with
your supplier, please contact the local authorities for further information.
ii
LIST OF TERMS
Abbr. NEC Description
NEC
(Trunk) Route Restriction Class
AIMWorX
Authorization Code
Background music (feature)
Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

PBC
TRFC
Boss/Secretary dialing
Broker's call
Busy in/busy out - ACD
Class of Service
Coin lines
Consecutive Speed Dialing
Consultation hold
Development table
Dial conversion
Dynamic Dial Pad
Executive calling
Ground Start
Hearing Aid Compatibility
Home side trunk
User side
trunk
Legacy
Location number
Loop Start
Mate side trunk
Network
side trunk
MATWorX
Multi line terminal
Multiple Call Forwarding
My Line
Nailed down connection (data)
Night Connection - fixed
Night connection - fixed
Night Connection - flexible
Office Code
PLE
CLID
One touch key

OpenWorX
Operator
Party lines
Peer to peer
Pilot number
Preset dialing
Prime Line
Restriction Class
Route Advance
Route Pattern
Save and Repeat
Secondary appearance
TRFC
LNR
Traffic Class
SMDR & CTI based management platform
PID code
When phone is idle, user can have
background music on speaker
Executive/Secretary
Shuttle : alternate between 2 parties
occupying one line
Group - Absent/Present switching
Facility Class Mark (sometimes traffic class)
Common number can be speed dial,
individual choice dialed manually
Enquiry
Analysis tree : table within numbering plan
Conversion from pulse to DTMF
Pressing numeric keys grabs a line as well.
VIP status assigned to a station.
Earth calling : analog trunk protocol
Voice volume control on terminals
For ISDN trunks
TDM based equipment (non IP)
Division based on capabilities or priorities in
the IP system
Subscriber signalling e.g. an ATU-SS
For ISDN trunks
Operational Maintenance interface tool
SOPHO Set / ErgoLine : digital terminal with
soft key assignment possible
Multi hop (maximum 5 hops allowed)
Users own station number.
Fixed connection between two data
adapters.
Permanent Line Extension
Permanent Line Extension
CF on night extension
Cluster Identity used for Open Numbering
Plans
Dterm keys, work (and programmed) like
speed dial function
CTI Application platform
PSTN operator / provider
Peer to peer : one to one relation on
functional level
Group number
En-block dialing : prepare number and send
it in one go (versus overlap dialing)
Seized line (trunk line or extension) when
going off-hook (or speaker)
Traffic Class
Alternative routing when trunk(s) busy
Tree : part of the number analysis table
Last Number Redial
park position / sub line
iii

NEC
Single line terminal
Software Line Appearance
Split Call Forwarding
Stack Dial
Stack Dial
Station
Station Class
Sub Line
Tenant
Trunk Route
Voice Call
Whisper page
Account Code (Client Billing Code)
Authorization Code Facility
AC
ACF
ADF
ALM DSPP (External) Alarm Display Panel
ANI
Automatic Number Identification
ANS
AOC
AP
AP
ATND
AttCon
BATTM
BGM
BHCA
BK
BSY
BT
CAMA
CAS
CAT
CCIS
CCT
CF-D
Answer
Advice of charge
Application Card
Analog Port
Attendant
Attendant console
Battery Module
Back Ground Music service
Busy Hour Call Attempts
Black
Busy
Busy Tone
Centralized Message Accounting
Centralized Attendant Service
Customer Administration terminal
Common Channel Interoffice
Signalling
Common Control Switching
arrangement
CCIS Trunk
Call Forwarding - Destination
CFT
CIC
Conference trunk
Circuit Identification Code
CID
CIR
CIS
CM
CNP
CO
COT
CPN
CPN
CPU
CRD
CS
CSU
DAT
Call ID Display
Caller ID Receiver
Call Information System
Command
Closed Numbering Plan
Central Office
Central Office Trunk
Calling Party Number
Calling Party Number
Central Processing Unit
Call Redirect
Cell Station
CCSA
iv
Digital Announcement Trunk

PBC
LNNR
Analog Phone
Virtual Extension
Separate CF for internal and external calls.
Last Number/Number Repetition
Outgoing calling list (5 entries)
Redial List : maximum 5 numbers
Extension /
DNR
FCM
Facility Class Mark
Lines on the stations, other then the prime
line
Analysis group : multi company on one PBX
Route
PID
Announcement without 3rd party hearing it.

Password integrated dialing
OAI related.
OAI related.
Caller subscriber number coming in with MF
signaling on T1 trunks
Operator console
A standard related to 911 service

Dterm used as programming device for PBX
Comparable to IMP
Customer specific leased lines/network, US
only
Call Forwarding Destination : no
preparation on originator necessary.
Trunk channel ID for virtual IP trunk
channels (Line number)
See Commands Manual
ISDN calling party number

NEC

PBC
DBM
DCH
DD key
DDD
DDI
DDOVR
DeskCon
DID calls
D-Channel Handler
Do not Disturb Key
Direct Distance Dialing
Direct Digital interface
Do not Disturb Override
Desk Console
Direct Inward Dialing calls
DISA
DIT
Direct Inward System Access

DID trunk / Direct Inward Termination PLE
DLC
DM
DMS
DNIS
DOD
Digital Line Circuit

Distributed Module
Distributed Module Small
Dialed number Identification Service
Direct Outward Dialing
DDO
DP
DPC
DPC
DRS
(Rotary) Dial Pulse

Data Port Controller
Destination Point Code
Device Registration Server
DS
DSS/BLF
Differential Services (DiffServ)

Direct Station Select / Busy Lamp
Field
Device Server WorX
Dial Tone
Data Terminal Equipment
Digital (or IP) terminal
Digital Tone Generator
Digital Trunk Interface
Forced Account Code
Federal Communications
Commission
Floppy Disk
Forwarded - All calls
Forwarded - Busy
Forwarded - No answer
Frame Ground
Feature Group D format
Free Location Facility
DSW
DT
DTE
Dterm
DTG
DTI
FAC
FCC
FD
FDA
FDB
FDN
FG
FGD
FLF
FP
FX
HDT
HWT
ICH
ICI
ICM
IEC
ILC
IP
IPM
IPS
IPT
IPX
IVS
Commands Manual - AP00 card
Firmware Processor
Foreign Exchange
Hold Tone
howler tone
ISDN channel handler
Incoming Call Identification
Intercom
International Electro-technical
Commission
ISDN line card
Internet Protocol
Indications per minute
Internet Protocol Server
IP trunk
Internet Protocol eXchange
Integrated Voice Server
T1/E1 interface to public network

SV
DDI
SuperVisor / Operator Console

Direct dialing in : not for FX and WATS
trunk (USA only)
Remote access to system
Permanent Line Extension(s) : for limited
direct inward dialing: 1/more trunk(s) related
to 1 station
For Dterm, Attendant and Desk Console.
Direct Dialing Out : setting up external calls

without attendant assistance
Pulse dialing
Kind of Cluster ID; for terminating office
Compare with Gatekeeper function:
registering endpoints
For Dterm assistant software
Dterm
Desktop Telephone (analog or digital)
American regulation office
Signalling format for ANI.

OIA related, Desksharing look-a-like.
NOT available for IPS 2000
Compare with PMC
Specific part of PSTN; US only
Alarm tone
IP
Internet Protocol
For flashing lamps / LEDs

NEC

PBC
KF
Key Feauture (registration)
KTF
LAN
LCR
Key Transfer Facility

Local Area Network
Least Cost Routing
LAN
LCCR
LDN
LDT
LEN
Listed Directory Number

Loop Dial trunk
Line Equipment Number
EHWA
LT
MAT
Line/Trunk
Maintenance Administration Terminal OMM
MB
Make Busy
MCI
MEM
MFG
MFR
MIB
MIC
MIS
MJ
MLDT
MN
MOC
MP
MRF
MSF
MSG
NEAX
NS
NTF
NTS
OAI
ODT
ODT
ONP
OPC
OPR
PAD
Message Center Interface

Main Memory
MF receiver / MFC receiver/sender
management Information Base
Microphone
management Information System
Major (alarm)
Melody Trunk
Minor (alarm)
PBR
PBSND
PC
PCK
PFT
PIM
Main Processor
Mode Reset Facility
Mode Set Feature
Message
NEC PBX
Network Station
Number Transfer Facility
Night Transfer Station
Open Application Interface
OD Trunk
Outband Dialing Trunk
Open Numbering Plan
Origional Point Code
Operator
(IP) Packet Assembler /
Disassembler
Push Button Receiver
Push Button Sender
Point Code
Pickup
Power Failure Transfer
Port Interface Module
PLO
PMS
Phase Locked Oscillator

Property Management System
PN
PNA
PPS
PROTIMS
PRT
PS
PS
QoS
Part Number
Phone line Network Alliance
Pulses per second
vi
SETOUT
ISDN primary rate interface trunk

Personal Station
Portable Station
Quality of Service
Key systems are operating directly on

outside lines.
OAI related.
Local Area Network
Least cost call routing : number analysis
development manner
Equipment hardware Address : PIM nbr (0 ~

7)+ Port nbr (00 ~ 63) LEN = (000 ~ 763)
Operation Maintenance module : PC
needed in terminals mode
Set to Out Of Service : Out of Service / Not
installed situation for reset or maintenance
Interface for Voice Mail system
Microphone or its key
OM terminal window, part of MATWorX

Compare with CPU
OAI related.
OAI related.
SOPHO
OAI related.
Night Extension
CTI interface
2/4 wire E&M
Kind of Cluster ID; for originating office

Attendant
Used for TDM / IP translation
DTMF receiver
DTMF sender
Shelf : comparable with CSM and PM

shelves
PMS
Property Management System (in hotel

environments)
For example PN-8DLCC board
Used in pulse dialing
Proprietary protocol, used for building CCIS
NEC wireless system

NEC
RAS
RBT
RC
REN
RLS
ROT
RPIM
RSC
RST
RTP
SCF
SDT
SLT
SMDR
SMFN
SMFR
SOC
SP
SPID
SPN
SSFM
SSFR
SST
STA
STN
TAH
TAS
TCF
TCM
TDM
TDS
TDSW
TIC
TMF
TMSF
TNT
TRF
TSW
UAP
UCD
UNP
USOC
VC
VCT
VDSL
VM
VOIP
WAN
WATS
WCS
WH
WU
ZT

PBC
Registration Admission Status

Ringback Tone
Room Cutoff
Ring Equivalence Number
Release
Reorder Tone
Remote PIM
Route restriction Class
Restricted
Real Time Protocol
Switch Control Facility
Special Dial Tone
Single Line Telephone
Station Message Detail Recording
FDCR
Status Monitor Facility (Notification)
Status Monitor Facility (Request)
System on chip
Soft Phone
Service Profile ID (ISDN)
BSP-ID
Special Part Number
Service Set facility Monitor
Service Set Facility Request
Service Set Tone
Station
Station
Trunk Appearance Hold
Trunk Answer Any Station
Terminal Control Facility
(Deluxe) Travelling Class Mark
Time division multiplexing
Time division switching
Time Division Switch
(Individual) Trunk identification Code
Terminal Multi-information transfer
Facility
(Terminal) Mode Set Facility
Tone/Music source interface
Transfer
Time Switched
User Application Processor
Uniform Call Distribution
Uniform Numbering Plan
User Service Order Code
Voice Compression
Voice CODEC circuit card
Very high data rate Digital Subscriber
Line
Voice Mail
Voice over IP
VOIP
Wide Area Network
WAN
Wide Area Telephone Service
Wireless Communication System
White
Wake up
Zone Transceiver
Registration Admission Status
OAI related.
Analog telephone
Full Detailed Call Recording
OAI related.
Basic Service Profile ID (ISDN)

OAI related.
OAI related.
Pickup incoming calls in night mode

OAI related.
Line numbers of trunk lines

OAI related.
OAI related.
Basic ACD. Distribution of calls based on

longest idle.
(Network) numbering plan
Other word for REN
Voice over IP
Wide Area Network
Specific part of PSTN, US only
"Analog DECT"
For Wireless system
vii
Dterm icon
Meaning
Hold
Transfer
Speaker
Answer
Redial
Conf(erence)
Recall
Feature
MIC
Message
Directory
-/+
Help
Exit
viii
ix
NEAX 2000 IPS

Installation Procedure Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................................................
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................
PURPOSE ....................................................................................................................
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL ......................................................................................
REFERENCE MANUAL ...............................................................................................
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ...........................................................................................
6
6
6
7
7
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION .........................................................................

TRUNKING DIAGRAM ................................................................................................
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS .....................................................................................
9
10
12
Floor Standing Installation ................................................................................................

Wall Mounting Installation .................................................................................................
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation ..................................................................................
12
15
16
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION ........................................................................
17
Module/Installation Hardware ............................................................................................

Control Card ........................................................................................................................
Application Processor Card ..............................................................................................
Line/Trunk Card ..................................................................................................................
17
20
23
30
LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL .................................................................

MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS .......................................................
42
45
Circuit Card Mounting Slots ..............................................................................................

Mountable Slots According to Number of Ports ..............................................................
Control Card Mounting Conditions ...................................................................................
Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions .........................................................
Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions .............................................................................
45
47
48
50
53
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................

PRECAUTIONS ...........................................................................................................
61
62
Grounding Requirements ..................................................................................................

Static Electricity Guard ......................................................................................................
Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards .........................................................
Turning Power ON ..............................................................................................................
Turning Power OFF ............................................................................................................
System Data Backup ..........................................................................................................
62
63
65
69
71
71
PROCEDURE ...............................................................................................................
72
Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin America, Australia) ..........................
74
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin America, Australia) ................................
Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe, Middle East) ...........................................
74
74
UNPACKING ................................................................................................................
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS ................................................................
75
76
AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System ..............................................................................

48 V DC Power Supply System ........................................................................................
76
80
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT .....................................................................
82
Floor Standing Installation ................................................................................................ 82

Wall Mounting Installation ................................................................................................. 100
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation .................................................................................. 103
BUS Cable Connection ....................................................................................................... 110
POWER CABLE CONNECTION ................................................................................. 111

AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System .............................................................................. 111
48 V DC Power Supply System ........................................................................................ 118
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST ................................................. 121

AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System .............................................................................. 121
48 V DC Power Supply System ........................................................................................ 125
BATTERY CONNECTION ........................................................................................... 129

Internal Battery Connection ............................................................................................... 131
External / BATTM Battery Connection .............................................................................. 134
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF ......................................................................................... 137

Installation of External MDF .............................................................................................. 137
MDF Cable ........................................................................................................................... 138
Cable Running to External MDF ........................................................................................ 141
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF ........................................................................ 144

Cable Connection to MDF ..................................................................................................
Location of Each LEN .........................................................................................................
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement ......................................................................................
MDF Cross Connections ....................................................................................................
144
145
150
167
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT ....................................................... 173

Peripheral Equipment and Card List .................................................................................
Analog C.O. Trunk (COT) ...................................................................................................
Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT) ..................................................................................................
DID Trunk (DIT) ...................................................................................................................
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) ...............................................................................................
Optical Fiber Interface (M10) .............................................................................................
POTS Splitter (M13) ............................................................................................................
In-Skin HUB .........................................................................................................................
Single Line Telephone (LC/LLC) .......................................................................................
173
175
176
185
186
193
197
201
203
Dterm/DSS Console (DLC) ................................................................................................... 205

SN716 DESKCON (DLC) ..................................................................................................... 207
ii
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC) ...................................................................................
Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP) .........................................................
External TAS Indicator (DK) ...............................................................................................
Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP) ...............................................................................
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP) .......................................
External BGM Source (COT/TNT) ......................................................................................
Power Failure Transfer (PFT) .............................................................................................
Alarm Display Panel (MP) ..................................................................................................
Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP) ................................................................................
Built-in SMDR/PMS on IP (MP) ..........................................................................................
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00) ............................................................
237
245
246
249
252
257
259
264
265
268
269
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS ..................................................................................... 275

SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ........................................................................................... 277
All Clear, Except LEN000 CAT ........................................................................................... 277
Resident System Program ................................................................................................. 277
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY ............................................................................................... 278

CAT ...................................................................................................................................... 278
MAT ...................................................................................................................................... 279
Confirming Lamp Indication .............................................................................................. 279
OPERATION TEST ...................................................................................................... 280

SYSTEM DATA SAVE ................................................................................................. 281
CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK .............................................................................. 281
Cleaning ............................................................................................................................... 281
Visual Check ....................................................................................................................... 281
MOUNTING FRONT COVER ....................................................................................... 282

BACKUP CPU SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 283
Required Equipment ...........................................................................................................
Service Conditions .............................................................................................................
Installation Procedure ........................................................................................................
Mounting Locations of MP Cards ......................................................................................
MP System Changeover .....................................................................................................
Office Data Copy .................................................................................................................
283
284
285
286
287
288
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS ....................................... 289

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ................................................................................ 290
CONTROL CARD ........................................................................................................ 291
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP) ......................................................
PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP) ..............................................................................................
PN-CP15 (FP) .......................................................................................................................
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR) ...........................................................................................................
PZ-M606-A (ETHER) ............................................................................................................
iii
292
298
303
305
307
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
JULY/15/2007
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR) ....................................................................................................
PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR) ....................................................................................................
PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) ....................................................................................................
PZ-PW135 (PWR) ................................................................................................................
309
312
315
317
APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD .......................................................................... 319

PN-AP00-B (AP00) ..............................................................................................................
PN-AP00-D (AP00) ..............................................................................................................
PN-AP00-B (DBM) ...............................................................................................................
PN-BRTA (BRT) ...................................................................................................................
PN-2BRTC (BRT) .................................................................................................................
PN-2BRTK (BRT) .................................................................................................................
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT) .............................................................................................................
PN-24CCTA (CCT) ...............................................................................................................
PN-30CCTA (CCT) ...............................................................................................................
PN-CFTC (CFT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-CFTC-A (CFT) ................................................................................................................
PN-DAIA-A (DAIA) ...............................................................................................................
PN-DAIB (DAIB) ...................................................................................................................
PN-DAIC (DAIC) ...................................................................................................................
PN-DAID-A (DAID) ...............................................................................................................
PN-DAIE (DAIE) ...................................................................................................................
PN-DAIF (DAIF) ...................................................................................................................
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH) ......................................................................................................
PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT) ......................................................................................................
PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT) ......................................................................................................
PN-24DTA-C (DTI) ...............................................................................................................
PN-30DTC-C (DTI) ...............................................................................................................
PN-8ETIA (HUB) ..................................................................................................................
PN-2ILCC (ILC) ....................................................................................................................
PN-8IPTA (SIP) ....................................................................................................................
PN-IPTB (IPT) ......................................................................................................................
PN-24PRTA (PRT) ...............................................................................................................
PN-30PRTA (PRT) ...............................................................................................................
PN-4RSTB (MFR) .................................................................................................................
PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A (CIR) ...........................................................................................
PN-SC00 (CCH) ...................................................................................................................
PN-SC01 (DCH) ...................................................................................................................
PN-SC03-B/PN-SC03-C (CSH) ............................................................................................
PN-SC03-B (ICH) .................................................................................................................
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM) ............................................................................................................
iv
321
327
333
336
341
346
351
359
365
372
374
376
381
385
388
394
398
402
407
414
421
427
433
435
440
444
448
456
463
465
467
470
473
475
477
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
JULY/15/2007
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PZ-M542 (CONN) ................................................................................................................. 480
PZ-M557 (CONN) ................................................................................................................. 482
LINE/TRUNK CARD .................................................................................................... 484

PN-2AMPA (AMP) ................................................................................................................
PN-CFTA (CFT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-CFTB (CFT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-2COTD (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-2COTE (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-4COTA-A (COT) .............................................................................................................
PN-4COTB (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-4COTE (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-4COTF (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-4COTG (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-6COTJ (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-8COTH (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-8COTQ (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-8COTR (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-8COTS (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-8COTT (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-8COTU (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-2CSIA (CSI) ....................................................................................................................
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI) ................................................................................................................
PN-2CSIH (CSI) ....................................................................................................................
PN-4CSIA (CSI) ....................................................................................................................
PN-4CSIA-A (CSI) ................................................................................................................
PN-4DATC (DAT) .................................................................................................................
PN-4DIDA (DIT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-2DITA (DIT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-4DITB (DIT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-DK00 (DK) ......................................................................................................................
PN-2DLCN (DLC) .................................................................................................................
PN-4DLCM (DLC) ................................................................................................................
PN-4DLCT (DLC) .................................................................................................................
PN-4DLCQ (DLC) .................................................................................................................
PN-8DLCL (DLC) .................................................................................................................
PN-8DLCP (DLC) .................................................................................................................
PN-2ILCA (ILC) ....................................................................................................................
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) ..............................................................................................................
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD) ............................................................................................................
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) ........................................................................................................
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
508
511
514
517
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
534
537
541
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PN-4LCC (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCD-A (LC) ..................................................................................................................
PN-4LCE (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCF (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCK (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCL (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCV (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCW (LC) .....................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAA (LC) ...................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAB (LC) ...................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAD (LC) ...................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAE (LC) ....................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAF (LC) ....................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAK (LC) ...................................................................................................................
PN-2LDTA (LDT) ..................................................................................................................
PN-4LDTA (LDT) ..................................................................................................................
PN-4LLCB (LLC) ..................................................................................................................
PN-M10 (M10) ......................................................................................................................
PN-M13 (M13) ......................................................................................................................
PN-2ODTA (ODT) ................................................................................................................
PN-2ODTB (ODT) ................................................................................................................
PN-4ODTA (ODT) ................................................................................................................
PN-4RSTF/PN-4RSTF-A (SDT) ...........................................................................................
PN-4RSTH (SDT) .................................................................................................................
PN-8RSTG (PBR) .................................................................................................................
PN-RTA (RTA) .....................................................................................................................
PN-TNTA (TNT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-4VCTI (4VCT) .................................................................................................................
PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT) ..................................................................................
PZ-8PFTB (PFT) ..................................................................................................................
PZ-M623 (ETHER) ...............................................................................................................
PZ-M649 (DTI) ......................................................................................................................
PZ-M650 (DTI) ......................................................................................................................
PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10) ............................................................
PZ-VM01 (VM01) ..................................................................................................................
PZ-VM02 (VM02) ..................................................................................................................
PZ-VM03-M (VM03) ..............................................................................................................
PZ-VM04 (VM04) ..................................................................................................................
PZ-VM05 (VM05)/PZ-VM06 (VM06) .....................................................................................
vi
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
563
565
566
567
568
570
571
572
573
576
578
580
582
583
584
587
590
593
594
597
602
603
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(1)
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
(2)
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.
(3)
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
(4)
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
(5)
Read and understand all instructions.
(6)
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
(7)
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol
cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
(8)
Do not use this product near water; for example, under water pipes near a bath tub, sink, or laundry
tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
(9)
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious
damage to the product.
(10) Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect it
from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be
blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never
be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a built-in
installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
(11) This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label.
If you are not sure of the type of power source available, consult with your local power company.
(12) This product is normally connected with a three wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet. This is a safety feature.
If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete
outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug.
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(13) Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be
abused by persons walking on it.
(14) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
(15) Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous
voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid
of any kind on the product.
(16) To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a qualified
serviceman when some service or repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may expose
you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the
appliance is subsequently used.
(17) Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.

If liquid has been spilled into the product.
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls, that are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of
other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified
technician to restore the product to normal operation.
(e) If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
(f) If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
(18) Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
(19) Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(20) For Digital interfaces, a CSU/DSU may be required for proper operation. When choosing a CSU/
DSU, make sure that it is provided with suitable lightning protection. If this is not the case, gas tube
arresters as specified elsewhere in this manual (b) must be connected to the involved interface wiring.
NOTE:
The Ethernet ports are not intended to be connected directly to outdoor cables.
PBX
MDF
OFF-PREMISE
PRT/BRT/DTI/CCT
CSU/DSU
RECEIVE
RA
RB
TRANSMIT
To Digital
Network
TA
TB
CSU : Customer Service Unit

DSU : Digital Service Unit
MDF : Main Distribution Frame
(21) When installing the LC card for providing the analog telephone interface that is connected to offpremise site, use PN-4LLCB card.
(22) Do not install the PN-2ODTB/PN-4ODTA card for providing the analog trunk interface that is
connected to off-premise site.
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(23) When installing the BRI/PRI/E1/CCIS/Q-SIG/Dterm interface designated by SELV that has the
possibility of being connected to off-premise site, gas tube arrester is required for proper operation.
(a) Installation
When installing the DLC card for providing the Dterm interface that is connected to off-premise
site, use PN-2DLCN/PN-4DLCT card and connect gas tube arrester across the line as shown in
Figure below.
PBX
MDF
GAS TUBE
ARRESTER
DLC
OFF-PREMISE
R
G
To Dterm

G
When installing the BRT/PRT/DTI/CCT card for providing the BRI/PRI/E1/CCIS/Q-SIG

interface that is connected to off-premise site, connect gas tube arresters across each transmit and
receive line as shown in Figure below.
MDF
PBX
GAS TUBE
ARRESTER
BRT/PRT/DTI/CCT
OFF-PREMISE
RECEIVE
RA
G
RB
TRANSMIT
To Digital
Network
TA
G
TB
GAS TUBE
ARRESTER
G
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(b) Specifications
Specifications of the gas tube arrester to be provided are as follows.
PARAMETER
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission bandwidth
DC to 2MHz
Transmission loss
Less than 0.5dB
Longitudinal balance
More than 50dB
Nominal decoupling resistance
1ohm 0.5%
Operating voltage
DC 60V Max.
Nominal DC spark-over voltage
90V
Impulse spark-over voltage (at 1.2/50s 6kV)
1500V (at initial max. voltage; 0 to 10s)

20V (at more than10s)
Nominal discharge current
100 A (at 10/200s)
(24) Warning for US and Canada only
WARNING
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm
INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE/OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE
This manual explains the installation procedure for the NEAX 2000 IPS system. This equipment can only
be serviced by a qualified service person. You should perform each installation step according to the procedures described in CHAPTER 2.
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL

This manual consists of three chapters. The following paragraphs summarize Chapters 1 through 3.
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter explains the outline of system configuration, the name and functions
of equipment, the line conditions of each terminal, and the mounting conditions of
circuit cards used in the system.
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
This chapter explains how to install the PBX and the peripheral equipment, system
initialization and data entry, and operation test procedures you should follow after
completing the installation.
CHAPTER 3
LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS

This chapter explains the meaning of lamp indications and the switch settings of
each circuit card used in the system.
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm
INTRODUCTION
REFERENCE MANUAL/TERMS IN THIS MANUAL
REFERENCE MANUAL
During installation, refer also to the NEAX 2000 IPS manuals below:
System Manual:
Contains the system description, hardware installation procedure, the programming procedure for the
NEAX 2000 IPS System.
Command Manual:
Contains Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) operation, command function and data required
for programming the system, and Resident System Program.
Office Data Programming Manual:
Contains the Customer Specifications Sheets and the Office Data Programming Sheets.
Feature Programming Manual:
Contains procedure for programming each business and hotel feature.
Maintenance Manual:
Contains the maintenance service features and the recommended troubleshooting procedure.
MATWorX User Guide:
Provides information to use the MATWorX program, including highlights about features of the
program.
This guide is a supplement to the MATWorX online Help system, which provides context-sensitive
information and procedures to perform tasks using MATWorX.
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

In this manual, PBX system is designated as PBX usually. And the following is used if the type of the
PBX system need to be identified.
NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER: NEAX 2000 IPS
NOTE:
In regard to China market, we have not released NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL
SERVER but NEAX2000 is released.
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter explains the outline of system configuration, the name and functions of equipment, the line conditions of each terminal, and the mounting
conditions of circuit cards used in the system.
TRUNKING DIAGRAM ..............................................................

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ...................................................
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION ......................................
LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL ...............................
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS .....................
10
12
17
42
45
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

TRUNKING DIAGRAM
TRUNKING DIAGRAM
This figure shows a typical trunking diagram for the system.
Trunking Diagram
NOTE:
The equipment marked with (*) is provided by the customer.

PFT
COT
SINGLE LINE TEL
LC
MP
LONG LINE STATION

SINGLE LINE TEL
WITH MESSAGE
WAITING LAMP
LLC
INCLUDING
LC
TDSW
DTG
PBSND
16CFT
MLDT
PLO
MEM
MODEM
PBR
DAT
DK
TNT
SMDR
PMS
DRS
FP
OAI
IPT
CSH
ILC
ISDN TERMINAL
D
term
DLC
DSS
LONG LINE
Dterm
DLC
DSS
ATTCON/DESKCON
DLC
CSI
CS/ZT
PS
HomePNA/
VDSL
ADAPTER
LC/LLC
M13
CSI
PC
HUB
ROUTER
SMDR
DtermIP/IP-CS/
PC FOR OAI/
MAT/
SMDR/
PMS
LD
LDT
M10
TIE LINE
2W/4W E&M
ODT
OPTICAL
FIBER
M10
DTI/
REMOTE PIM
CCIS
NETWORK
DIGITAL
LINK
CCT
DTI
BRT
ISDN
NETWORK
PRT
CCH
CSH
DCH
DIGITAL
LINK
(FOR M649/M650)
RTA
ROUTER
4VCT
IPT
HomePNA/
VDSL MODEM
16VCT
IP-PAD
ROUTER
IP-PAD
ROUTER
AP00
IP
NETWORK
EXPMEM
PMS
AD-8/IM-16
CIS/HOTEL
PRINTER/
MCI(VMS)
DID LINE
DIT
PBR
DAT
INTERNET
AMP
ICH
POTS
SPLITTER
SINGLE LINE TEL
C.O. LINE
24DSP
VM
ROUTER
ROUTER/HUB
SIP
TCP/IP
ETHER
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
CIR
MFR
RS-232C
MAT/SMDR
SIP NETWORK
24DSP
CFT
KEY(*)
DK
ALARM
DISPLAY
PANEL
DK
PoE
IP TERMINAL
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
MAT
PSTN
HUB
COT
COT
COT
ANNOUNCEMENT
MACHINE(*)
EXTERNAL HOLD
TONE(*)
AMPLIFIER
COT
(FOR REMOTE MAINTENANCE)
COT/TNT
FP
TNT
10
BGM (*)
SPEAKER(*)
EXTERNAL HOLD
TONE(*)
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

TRUNKING DIAGRAM
Description of Symbols in Trunking Diagram

SYMBOL
AMP
AP00
BGM
BRT
CCH
CCT
16CFT
CFT
CIS
CIR
COT
CSH
CSI
CS/ZT
DAT
DCH
DIT
DK
DLC
DRS
24DSP
DSS
DTI
DTG
ETHER
EXPMEM
FP
ICH
ILC
IP-CS
IP-PAD
IPT
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
Amplifier Trunk Card
SMDR/Hotel Application Card
External Music Source for Dterm
Back Ground Music Service
Basic Rate Interface Trunk Card
Common Channel Handler Card
CCIS Trunk Card
16 Circuit Four Party Conference
Trunk on MP
Conference Trunk Card
Call Information System
CALLER ID Receiver Trunk Card
C.O. Trunk Card
CS/ZT Handler Card/Virtual CSH for
IP-CS on MP
CS/ZT Interface Card
Cell Station (for PHS)
Zone Transceiver (for PCS)
4-line Digital Announcement Trunk
Card/2-line Built-in DAT on MP
D-channel Handler Card
DID Trunk Card
External Relay/Key Interface Card/
Built-in DK on MP
Digital Line Circuit Card (for Dterm,
ATTCON, DESKCON)
Device Registration Server on MP
24-channel DSP Card
DSS Console
Digital Trunk Interface Card
Digital Tone Generator on MP
Ethernet Control Card
Memory Expansion Card
Firmware Processor Card/Built-in FP
on MP/Virtual FP on MP
ISDN-channel Handler Card
ISDN Line Circuit Card
Cell Station on IP (for PHS)
8-channel IP-PAD Card
IP Trunk Card/Virtual IPT on MP
KEY
LC
LDT
LLC
M10
M13
MAT
MDF
MEM
MFR
MLDT
MODEM
MP
OAI
ODT
PBR
PBSND
PFT
PLO
PMS
PRT
PS
RTA
SIP
SMDR
TDSW
TNT
4VCT
16VCT
VM
11
DESCRIPTION
External Key
Line Circuit Card
(for Single Line Telephone)
LD Trunk Card
Long Line Circuit Card
Optical Fiber Interface Card
POTS Splitter Card
Maintenance Administration Terminal
Main Distribution Frame
Main Memory on MP
MF Receiver/
MFC Receiver/Sender Card
Melody Trunk on MP
Modem on MP
Main Processor Card
Open Application Interface/Built-in
OAI on MP
OD Trunk Card (2/4 wire E&M)
8-line PB Receiver Card/4-line PB
Receiver on MP
PB Sender on MP
Phase Locked Oscillator on MP
Property Management System/Builtin PMS on MP
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Trunk
Card
Personal Station
In-Skin Router Card
SIP Trunk Card
SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
Station Message Detail Recording/
Built-in SMDR on MP
Time Division Switch on MP
Tone/Music Source Interface Card/
Built-in TNT on MP
4-channel CODEC Card
16-channel CODEC Card
Voice Mail Card
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
The system provides three installation methods as follows:
Floor Standing Installation
Wall Mounting Installation
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
Example of system configurations for each installation method are shown below.

1-PIM Configuration for Floor Standing Installation
223 (8.8)
430 (16.9)
PIM
417 (16.4)
NOTE
UNIT : mm (inch)
BASE
FRONT
NOTE:
Height (65 mm (2.6)) of the BASE is included.
12
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

2-PIM Configuration for Floor Standing Installation

223 (8.8)
430 (16.9)
PIM
769 (30.2)
NOTE
PIM/BATTM
BASE
FRONT
UNIT : mm (inch)
NOTE:
13
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

Maximum Configuration for Floor Standing Installation
223 (8.8)
860 (33.9)
PIM3
PIM2
PIM7
PIM1
PIM6
1473
(58.0)
1825
(71.8)
NOTE
PIM0
PIM5
PIM4
BATTM
BATTM
BASE
FRONT
NOTE:
UNIT : mm (inch)
14
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm


1-PIM Configuration for Wall-Mounting Installation
PIM
BASE
15
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm


1-PIM Configuration for 19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
PIM
19BRACKET
BASE
19-inchRACK
16
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

This section explains the names and functions of the equipment (modules, installation hardware, circuit
cards) used in the system.
Module/Installation Hardware
This table shows the names and functions of the modules.
Module Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
SN1617
PIMMD
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM)

Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption
(for 30 minutes).
At maximum configuration, the system consists of eight PIMs,
and provides a total of 512 physical ports (64 ports 8).
SN1663
PIMMG
[For EU]
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM)

(for 30 minutes).
At maximum configuration, the system consists of eight PIMs,
and provides a total of 512 physical ports (64 ports 8).
SN1658
PIMMF
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM) for Backup CPU System

(for 30 minutes).
One PIM is required per Backup CPU System.
SN1664
PIMMH
[For EU]
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM) for Backup CPU System

(for 30 minutes).
One PIM is required per Backup CPU System.
Continued on next page
17
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

Module Name and Function

NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
COVER
PARTS
ASSEM-A
COVER PARTS
ASSEM
Cover Parts Assembly

One cover parts assembly is required for each PIM.
SN1545
BASERE
BASE/TOP
ASSEM
Base/Top Cover Assembly

One base and top cover assembly is required for each stack.
SN1685
BASEUC
BASE
Base for DC48 V Power Input System

Installation Cable to Terminal Blocks from this Base is to be local
provided.
SN1619
BATTMB
BATTM
Battery Module for housing PIM or CS (ZT) backup batteries

Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power interruption (for 3 hours).
SN1671
BATTMG
[For EU]
BATTM
Battery Module for housing PIM backup batteries

Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power interruption (for 3 hours).
TOP COVER
ASSEM
18
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

This table shows the names and functions of installation hardware.
Installation Hardware Name and Function

NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
HANGER ASSEM (B)
Wall Hanger Assembly

One HANGER ASSEM is required per PIM for Wall Mounting
Installation.
MOUNTING BRACKET
Safety Mounting Bracket

Used as an overhead hanger for Floor Standing Installation. Wire,
chain or eyebolts are to be locally provided, to secure the bracket.
To be installed on the top PIM in four or more modules of stack. It
provides 1.1G shockproof construction.
19 RACK BRACKET (A)
19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type A

One bracket is required for one PIM configuration.
One bracket is required for the top PIM of multiple module configuration.
19 RACK BRACKET (B)
19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type B

One bracket is required for the bottom module of multiple module
configuration.
I/F BRACKET ASSEM
Inter Frame Bracket Assembly

Used to joint the frames in two-frame configuration, for Floor
Standing Installation.
BASE TRAY ASSEM
Base Tray Assembly

One BASE TRAY is required per one frame for Floor Standing
Installation of Stationary Equipment.
19
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

Control Card
This table shows the names and functions of each control card.
NOTE:
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM) card is not required for the MP (PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/

PN-CP24-D/PN-CP26-A/PN-CP26-B) card.
Control Card Name and Function

NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B
MP
Main Processor Card

Provides LAN control function, system-based Device Registration
Server (DRS), built-in FP, Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR
on RS-232C, built-in SMDR on IP*, built-in PMS on IP*, Virtual
IPT, Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB,
Flash ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB
sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode), two RS232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum 128 seconds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance
(33.6 Kbps), Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface. BUS interface
functions as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay
timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
One card is required per system.
*: Series 3400 software enhancement
PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D
MP
Main Processor Card

Server (DRS), built-in FP, Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR
on RS-232C, built-in SMDR on IP*, built-in PMS on IP*, Virtual
IPT, Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB,
Flash ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB
Supports MP Program Download (FTP)**.
Once card is required per system.
* : Series 3400 software enhancement
** : Series 3500 software enhancement
20
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-CP27-A/
PN-CP27-B
MP
Main Processor Card for Backup CPU system

Server (DRS), Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR on RS232C, built-in SMDR on IP*, built-in PMS on IP*, Virtual IPT,
Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB, Flash
ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB
Two cards are required per Backup CPU system.
One card for active MP [MP0] and another card for stand by MP
[MP1].
*: Series 3400 software enhancement
PN-CP15
FP
Firmware Processor Card

Provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768 KB), and
inter-module BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/
receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable
delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS. When the system
consists of three PIMs or more, one each of this card is mounted
respectively in PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
PZ-M606-A
ETHER
Ethernet Control Card

Mounted on MP card to accommodate the Ethernet and transmit/
receive a signal of TCP/IP protocol.
Provides Auto Negotiation function.
Always set to ON
[For Series 3300 software or before]
Set to ON/OFF by the office data setting
[For Series 3400 software or later]
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly
to this card.
21
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-PW00
EXTPWR
Power Supply Card for DESKCON

Provides 48 V DC power.
Maximum 4 cards per frame (4PIMs). Maximum 3 cards per PIM.
Occupies two physical slots width per card.
PZ-PW121
AC/DC PWR
Main Power Supply Card

Input: AC120 V/240 V (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Output: 27 V (4.4 A), +5 V (7.2 A), CR (38 mA), +90 V (80 mA)
One card is pre-installed per PIM.
PZ-PW126
[For UK/EU]
AC/DC PWR
Main Power Supply Card

Input: AC240 V (60 Hz)
Output: 27 V (4.4 A), +5 V (7.2 A), CR (38 mA), +90 V (80 mA)
One card is pre-installed per PIM.
PZ-PW122
DC/DC PWR
48 V DC Power Supply Card

Input: 24 V DC
Output: 48 V DC (1.7 A)
One card per PIM.
Used as main power supply from PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A/PN4DLCT/PN-4LDTA/PN-4LLCB/PN-4ODAT card to terminals.
PZ-PW135
PWR
Main Power Supply Card for 48 V DC

Input: DC48 V
Output: DC27 V (4.5 A), +5 V (7.2 A), CR (38 mA),
+90 V (80 mA), 48 V (1.8 A)
Mounted in A361 PIM-DC (One card per 1 PIM)
22
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

Application Processor Card

This table shows the names and functions of each application processor card.
NOTE:
PN-AP01 (AP01) card and PN-CC01 (ETHER) card cannot be mounted in NEAX 2000 IPS.
Application Processor Card Name and Function

NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-AP00-B
[For PCS]
DBM
Data Base Module Card for WCS Roaming function

One card per system.
Supports number extension of PS.
[Series 3400 software required]
PN-AP00-B
AP00

Provides four RS-232C ports, and is used for SMDR, Hotel
Printer, CIS, PMS, MCI functions.
(For PMS function, PN-AP00-B with MRCA program is not
available.)
PN-AP00-D
AP00

Provides four RS-232C ports, and is used for SMDR, Hotel
Printer, CIS, MCI functions.
PN-BRTA
BRT
1-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card

Accommodates one 2-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-2BRTC
BRT

Accommodates two 2-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-2BRTK
[For UK]
BRT

Accommodates two 2-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-4BRTA-A
BRT

Accommodates four 2-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-24CCTA
CCT
CCIS (1.5 Mbps) Trunk Card

Provides a built-in Common Channel Handler (CCH) of No.7
CCIS.
23
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-30CCTA
CCT
CCIS (2 Mbps) Trunk Card

CCIS.
PN-CFTC
CFT
32 Party Conference Trunk Card

Maximum eight cards per system.
PN-CFTC-A
CFT
8/32 Party Conference Trunk Card

Maximum eight cards per system.
PN-DAIA-A
DAIA
T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM

Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor and BUS interface.
One through six cards must be provided at Main Site, which corresponds to the number of Remote Site.
PN-DAIB
DAIB
T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM

Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor.
One card is required per Remote PIM at Remote Site.
PN-DAIC
DAIC
T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Channel Expansion Card

Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.
One through twelve cards can be provided at Main Site.
Two cards can be provided at Remote Site.
PN-DAID-A
DAID
E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM

Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor and BUS interface.
One through six cards must be provided at Main Site, which corresponds to the number of Remote Site.
PN-DAIE
DAIE
E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM

Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor.
One card is required per Remote PIM at Remote Site.
24
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-DAIF
DAIF
E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Channel Expansion Card

One through six cards can be provided at Main Site.
One card can be provided at Remote Site.
PN-DTA
CCH
Common Channel Handler for Event Based CCIS

Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling channel of
Event Based CCIS.
PN-DTA
CCT
CCIS (1.5 Mbps/2 Mbps) Trunk Card

CCIS.
PN-DTA
DTI
T1 (1.5 Mbps)/E1 (2 Mbps) Digital Trunk Interface Card

PN-DTA
PRT
ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D/30B+D) Interface Card

Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).
PN-DTB
CCH
Common Channel Handler for Event Based CCIS

Event Based CCIS.
PN-DTB
CCT
CCIS (1.5 Mbps/2 Mbps) Trunk Card

CCIS.
PN-DTB
DTI
T1 (1.5 Mbps)/E1 (2 Mbps) Digital Trunk Interface Card

PN-DTB
PRT
ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D/30B+D) Interface Card

PN-24DTA-C
DTI
T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card

PN-30DTC-C
DTI
E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card

25
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-8ETIA
HUB
In-Skin HUB Card

PN-8ETIA: Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic change
MDI/MDI-X automatic change
L2 Switch function (Auto-Negotiation fixed)
PZ-M675: PZ-M675 card is mounted on PN-8ETIA card.
Power over Ethernet (PoE) : All Ethernet port
NOTE: Power over Ethernet (PoE) function is based on IEEE
802.3af and the NEC standard.
PN-2ILCC
ILC
2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card

Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
This card does not require PN-SC03-B (ICH) card.
PN-8IPTA
SIP
8 channel SIP Trunk Card

When mounting 24DSP (PZ-24IPLA) card, this card provides up
to 32-channel of SIP
By the office data setting, changes the setting of the card in 8
channel units.
to this card.
NOTE
Always set to OFF
Set to ON/OFF by the switch setting
NOTE:
When using the firmware program of SC-3591 IPS IPTT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPTA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firmware program of SC-3249 IPS IPTT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPTA card, Auto Negotiation function is always set to ON.
26
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-IPTB
IPT
IP Trunk Card
Provides LAN Interface, transmitting/receiving compressed voice
or signals over IP network.
Provides Auto Negotiation function (Set to ON/OFF by the switch
setting).
Used together with maximum of four 4VCT (PN-4VCTI) cards
(16-channels).
to this card.
PN-24PRTA
PRT
ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D) Interface Card

PN-30PRTA
PRT
ISDN Primary Rate (30B+D) Interface Card

PN-4RSTB
MFR
4-line MF Receiver, MFC Receiver/Sender Card

Used for MF/MFC-R2 Signaling on DID/DOD trunks.
Maximum four cards can be provided per system, including the
PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A card.
PN-4RSTC
CIR
4-line Caller ID Receiver Trunk Card

Used for Caller ID (CLASS SM) on analog trunks.
Maximum four cards per system, including the PN-4RSTB card.
PN-4RSTC-A
CIR
4-line Caller ID Receiver Trunk Card

Used for Caller ID (CLASS SM) on analog trunks.
Maximum four cards per system, including the PN-4RSTB card.
PN-SC00
CCH
Common Channel Handler Card

No. 7 CCIS.
PN-SC01
DCH
D-channel Handler Card

Transmits/receives signals on the D-channel of ISDN Primary
Rate (23B+D) interface or WCS Roaming interface.
PN-SC03-B
ICH
ISDN-channel Handler Card

Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls maximum
four ILC cards (Layer 2 and 3).
27
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-SC03-B
CSH
CS (ZT) Handler Card for S-interface/U-interface

four CSI cards, eight CS (ZT)s.
PN-SC03-C
CSH
CS (ZT) Handler Card for S-interface/U-interface

four CSI cards, eight CS (ZT)s.
PZ-M537
EXPMEM
Memory Expansion Card for AP00 Card

The system capacity is expanded when PZ-M537 is mounted on
PN-AP00-B (AP00) card.
This card is not required for PN-AP00-D (AP00) card.
Memory Expansion for AP00 is shown in the table below.
PZ-M542
CONN
Coaxial Cable Connection Card

Used to connect a coaxial cable for the Digital Trunk Interface.
Maximum two cards can be connected to LTC connector of each
PIM.
PZ-M557
[For
Australia]
CONN
Coaxial Cable Connection Card

Used to connect a coaxial cable for the Digital Trunk Interface.
Maximum two cards can be connected to LTC connector of each
PIM.
28
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

Memory Expansion for AP00 (SMDR Call Record)

No EXPMEM
Local Office of
Type of
Centralized
PN-AP00-B
Billing-CCIS
/Stand-alone is
provided.
With EXPMEM
Center Office
of Centralized
Billing-CCIS is
provided.
PN-AP00-B
with AP00
program
1600
800
PN-AP00-B
with MRCA
program
2620
1965
PN-AP00-D
with MRCA
program
23580
22925
29
Local Office of
Centralized
Billing-CCIS
/Stand-alone is
provided.
Center Office
of Centralized
Billing-CCIS is
provided.
27000: Call Record for CIS is not provided.

26000: Call Record for CIS is provided.
23580
22925
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

Line/Trunk Card
This table shows the names and functions of each line/trunk card.
Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-2AMPA
AMP
2-line Amplifier Trunk Card

Provides Echo Canceller (EC), Automatic Gain Controller (AGC)
and Tone Disabler (TD) functions.
PN-CFTA
CFT

Use of one card: Can control a conference of up to six participants.
Use of two cards: Can control a conference of up to ten participants.
PN-CFTB
CFT

Use of one card: Can control a conference of up to six participants.
Use of two cards: Can control a conference of up to ten participants.
PN-2COTD
COT
2-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)

Provides metering pulse detection function.
PN-2COTE
[For
Australia/
Asia/
Middle East]
COT

Provides metering pulse detection function.
PN-4COTA-A
COT

Provides a detector for line fault conditions.
PN-4COTB
COT
4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start/Ground Start Trunk)

Provides loop detection, sending/detecting ground on Tip/Ring
wire.
PN-4COTE
[For
Australia]
COT

30
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-4COTF
COT
[For
New Zealand]

Provides loop holding, pulse sender, and a detector for groundsignals.
PN-4COTG
COT
4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start trunk)

Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the Caller ID (CLASS
SM) signal.
-law/A-law.
PN-6COTJ
[For
Australia]
COT

PN-8COTH
[For
Philippine]
COT

Loop resistance: Maximum 900
PN-8COTQ
COT

Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the Caller ID (CLASS
SM) signal.
-law only.
PN-8COTR
COT
PN-8COTS
COT

Provides loop detection, sending/detecting ground on Tip/Ring
wire.
PN-8COTT
[For
Australia]
COT

PN-8COTU
[For UK/EU]
COT

Provides loop detection.
PN-2CSIA
[For PCS]
CSI
2-line Zone Transceiver Interface Card

Used to interface with the ZT, based on ISDN S-interface.
Maximum two ZTs can be connected per CSI card.
31
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-2CSIA-A
[For PHS]
CSI
2-line Cell Station Interface Card

Used to interface with the CS, based on ISDN S-interface.
Maximum two CSs can be connected per CSI card.
PN-2CSIH
CSI
2-line Cell Station (Zone Transceiver) Interface Card

Used to interface with the CS (ZT), based on U-interface.
Maximum two CSs (ZTs) can be connected per CSI card.
PN-4CSIA
[For PHS]
CSI
4-line Cell Station Interface Card

Used to interface with the CS, based on U-interface.
Maximum four CSs can be connected per CSI card.
PN-4CSIA-A
[For PCS]
CSI
4-line Zone Transceiver Interface Card

Used to interface with the ZT, based on U-interface.
Maximum four ZTs can be connected per CSI card.
PN-4DATC
DAT
4-line Digital Announcement Trunk Card

Recording duration: Maximum 120 seconds
PN-4DIDA
[For North
America/
Australia/
New Zealand/
Asia]
DIT
4-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card

Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and PB to DP signal conversion.
Equipped with 48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-2DITA
[For Hong
Kong]
DIT

PN-4DITB
DIT

32
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-DK00
DK
8-circuit External Relay Control/External Key Scan Card

Provides the above-mentioned control functions on a per circuit
basis.
PN-2DLCN
DLC
2-line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65
(Series E/III), Dterm Series i/70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
[48 V version, 2-wire type]
Provides Line Test function.
PN-4DLCM
DLC
4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65 (Series E/
III), Dterm Series i/70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console,
ATTCON, DESKCON
PN-4DLCT
DLC
4-line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65
(Series E/III), Dterm Series i, DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
NOTE
PZ-PW122 is required.
PN-4DLCQ
DLC
III), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
PN-8DLCL
DLC
III), Dterm Series i/70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console,
ATTCON, DESKCON
NOTE:
PN-4DLCT card is not used fot Dterm 70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro).

33
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-8DLCP
DLC
III), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
PN-2ILCA
ILC
2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card

Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals.
PN-8IPLA
IP-PAD

Provides LAN Interface, Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accommodate Legacy Line/Trunk interface. And provides voice compression
DSP control functions such as voice compression control, DTMF relay
and FAX relay.
Voice compression protocols:
G.711 (64 Kbps), G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps/6.3 Kbps), G.729a
(8 Kbps)
NOTE 1
FAX protocol: Pass-through (G.711, G.726)
NOTE 2
Always set to ON
Set to ON/OFF by the switch setting
When mounting 24DSP (PZ-24IPLA) card, this card provides up to 32channel of IP-PAD (When using G.723.1, provides up to 24-channel of
IP-PAD).
Two cards can be accommodated per built-in FP/FP card, maximum 8
per system.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to
this card.
NOTE 1: When using G.723.1, 5.3Kbps is available for the receiving bit rate.
NOTE 2: When using the firmware program of SC-3330 IPS IPADT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPLA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firmware program of SC-3213 IPS IPADT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPLA card, Auto Negotiation
function is always set to ON.
34
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A
IP-PAD

Provides LAN Interface, Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accommodate Legacy Line/Trunk interface.
Provides voice compression DSP control functions such as voice
compression control, DTMF relay and FAX relay.
Voice compression protocol: G.711 (64Kbps)
FAX protocol: Pass-through (G.711)
NOTE
Used together with maximum two 16VCT cards.
Provides Auto Negotiation function (Set to ON/OFF by the switch
setting).
Two cards can be accommodated per built-in FP/FP card, maximum 8 per system.
100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card.
PN-4LCC
LC
4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones

Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
PN-4LCD-A
LC

Provides momentary open and Message Waiting Lamp control,
Line Test functions for each circuit.
Equipped with +80 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4LCE
[For
Australia]
LC

PN-4LCF
[For
Australia]
LC

Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, Line Test functions for
each circuit, and reverse function for only No.3 circuit.
PN-4LCK
[For China]
LC

NOTE:
IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA) card does not support FAX relay.

35
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-4LCL
[For China]
LC

PN-4LCV
[For Brazil]
LC

PN-4LCW
[For Brazil]
LC

PN-8LCAA
LC

Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open, Line
Test functions for each circuit.
PN-8LCAB
[For China]
LC

PN-8LCAD
LC
8-line Analog Line Circuit for Single Line Telephones Provides

Caller ID Display on analog station.
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open for
each circuit.
PN-8LCAE
[For China]
LC

each circuit.
PN-8LCAF
[For EU]
LC

each circuit.
[Series 3800 software or later required]
36
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JANUARY/26/2007


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-8LCAK
LC

[Series 3800 software (ver.3.0) or later required]
PN-2LDTA
LDT
2-line Loop Dial Trunk Card

Loop resistance : Maximum 2500 (including internal resistance
of the distant office equipment)
PN-4LDTA
LDT
4-line Loop Dial Trunk Card

Loop resistance : Maximum 3000 (including internal resistance
of the distant office equipment)
PN-4LLCB
LLC
4-line Analog Long Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Provides Caller ID Display on analog station.
Loop resistance for PB/DP type:
PB :
Maximum 1200
DP (20 PPS) : Maximum 1700
DP (10 PPS) : Maximum 2500
Including the internal resistance of the distant office equipment
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open/
reverse functions for each circuit.
PN-M10
M10
Optical Fiber Interface Card

Provides optical fiber interface for T1/E1 Digital Trunk Interface
(1.5 M/2 Mbps) or Remote PIM.
Line length : 10 km (6.2 miles) or less
Line coding : CMI
PN-M13
M13
24-line Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS) Splitter Card

Used to provide data communications for HomePNA (Phoneline Network Alliance)/VDSL (Very-high-data-rate Digital Subscriber Line).
PN-2ODTA
ODT
2-line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card

Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M trunk.
Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to the same purpose (2wire or 4-wire) in one card.
37
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JANUARY/26/2007


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-2ODTB
ODT
[For
New Zealand/
UK/EU]
2-line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card

Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to the same purpose
(2-wire or 4-wire) in one card.
PN-4ODTA
ODT
4-Line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card

48 V DC power (PZ-PW122 card) is required when using the signaling type I.
When it accommodates in the LT08 to LT11 slots of the PIM, connect speech
line circuits 2 and 3 with the CN1 connector on the front side of the card.
PN-4RSTF
[For North
America/
Asia excluding China]
SDT
4-line Sender Card for Caller ID Display on analog Single Line

Telephones
PN-4LLCB is required.
PN-4RSTF-A
[For North
America/
Asia including China]
SDT

Telephones
PN-4LLCB is required.
PN-4RSTH
[For Europe]
SDT

Telephones
PN-8LCAD is required.
PN-8RSTG
PBR
8-line PB Receiver Card

Used for a PB station line, DID or tie line.
PN-RTA
RTA
In-Skin Router Card

10/100BASE-TX: 1, 10BASE-T: 1, RS-232C (D-sub 9pin)
Maximum 8 cards per PIM
PZ-M649
DTI
T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card

Mounted on PN-RTA Card
T1 Digital Trunk Interface: 1
Built-in CSU
38
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PZ-M650
DTI
E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card

Mounted on PN-RTA Card.
E1 Digital Trunk Interface: 1
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card.
PZ-M623
ETHER
Ether Control Card

Mounted on PN-RTA Card
10BASE-T: 1
PN-TNTA
TNT
2-line Tone/Music Source Interface Card

Used for BGM or Music on Hold.
Provides two jacks for an external tone/music source.
PN-4VCTI
4VCT
4-channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk Card

NOTE 1
(8 Kbps)
FAX protocol: T.30
Used together with IP Trunk (PN-IPTB) card.
Four cards can be accommodated per IP Trunk (PN-IPTB) card,
maximum 32 per system.
PN-16VCTA/
PN-16VCTA-A
16VCT
16-channel CODEC Card for 32-channel IP-PAD Card

(8 Kbps)
NOTE 2
FAX protocol: T.30, Pass-through (G.711, G.726)
NOTE 3
Used together with IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A) card.
Two cards can be accommodated per IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN32IPLA-A) card, maximum 16 per system.
NOTE 1: When using 4VCT card for H.323, FAX relay is not available.
NOTE 2: When using G.723.1, 5.3 Kbps is available for the receiving bit rate.
NOTE 3: 16VCT (PN-16VCTA) card does not support FAX relay.
39
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PZ-24IPLA
24DSP
24-channel DSP Card for 8-channel IP-PAD Card

Provides Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accommodate Legacy
Line/Trunk Interface. And Provides voice compression DSP control
functions such as voice compression control, DTMF relay same as
IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA) card.
Used to expand the IP-PAD channel up to 32-channels.
PZ-8PFTB
PFT
8-line Power Failure Transfer Card

To be mounted in PFT slot of PIM.
One card per PIM.
PZ-VM00/
PZ-VM00-M
VM00
4-port Voice Mail Card (NEAXMail AD-8)

Number of ports : 4 ports (Up to 8 ports when PZ-VM01 is
mounted)
Occupies three physical slots width per card.
To be mounted in LT00 slot of PIM.
PZ-VM10-M
VM10
4-port Voice Mail Card (NEAXMail AD-8)

Number of ports : 4 ports (Up to 8 ports when PZ-VM01 is
mounted)
Occupies three physical slots width per card.
To be mounted in LT00 slot of PIM.
PZ-VM01
VM01
4-port Voice Mail Extension Card

To be mounted on PZ-VM00/VM00-M.
PZ-VM02
VM02
[For North
America/Australia]
This card consists of a digital signal processor for port interface

(4 ports), central processor unit for controlling various data, hard
disk unit to read/write the application software, and an internal
modem (14.4 Kbps) for remote maintenance. Moreover, mounted
into the LT00 slot (for CPU card) of the PIM0. One card per PBX
is available.
40
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PZ-VM03-M
[For North
America]
VM03
This card consists of a digital signal processor for port interface

(4 ports), central processor unit for controlling various data, hard
disk unit to read/write the voice mail application program and
voice mail information, and an internal modem (14.4 Kbps) for
remote maintenance. Moreover, this card can provide 16 ports
digital line circuit interface, and is mounted into the LT00 slot
(for CPU card) and LT01 slot (for DSP card) of the PIM0. One
card per PBX is available.
PZ-VM04
[For North
America]
VM04
This card provides additional 4 ports for transmitting/receiving

the voice information, and is used for expanding the port interface
up to 12 ports. It is mounted on the VM03 card.
PZ-VM05
[For North
America]
VM05

up to 8/16 ports. Moreover, this card is used for expanding the fax
port interface up to 4 ports. It is mounted on the VM03/VM04
card.
PZ-VM06
[For North
America]
VM06

up to 8/16 ports. It is mounted on the VM03/VM04 card.
41
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL

The cable length between the DLC card and terminal varies depending on the type of terminal.
This table shows the line conditions of each Dterm, DSS/BLF Console, and Attendant Console.
Line Conditions of Each Terminal

TERMINAL TYPE
Dterm Series i
(8 button)/
Dterm Series i
(16 button)/
Dterm75 (Series E)
(8 button)
Dterm Series i
(32 button)/
Dterm75 (Series E)
(16 button)/
Dterm75 (Series E)
(32 button)
CARD TYPE
CABLE LENGTH
(Cable 0.5 /24 AWG)
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
300 m (984 ft.)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
300 m (984 ft.)

[1200 m (3937 ft.)]
PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)
850 m (2788 ft.)

[1200 m (3937 ft.)]
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
200 m (656 ft.)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
200 m (656 ft.)

[1200 m (3937 ft.)]
PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)
850 m (2788 ft.)

[1200 m (3937 ft.)]
REMARKS
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
42
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005


TERMINAL TYPE
Dterm65 (Series III)
(8 button)
Dterm65 (Series III)

(24 button)
DSS/BLF Console
NOTE 3
CARD TYPE
CABLE LENGTH
(Cable 0.5 /24 AWG)
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
300 m (984 ft.)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
300 m (984 ft.)

[1200 m (3937 ft.)]
PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)
850 m (2788 ft.)

[1200 m (3937 ft.)]
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
150 m (492 ft.)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
150 m (492 ft.)

[1200 m (3937 ft.)]
PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)
850 m (2788 ft.)

[1200 m (3937 ft.)]
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
300 m (984 ft.)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
1200 m (3937 ft.)
PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)
1200 m (3937 ft.)
REMARKS
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 1: The value in the [ ] shows the cable length when local power is supplied.
NOTE 2: When using PN-8DLCL or PN-8DLCP card, it is not available for long line function, even if it
is equipped with Long Line Adapter.
NOTE 3: The DSS/BLF Console requires local AC/DC power supply.
43
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005


CABLE LENGTH
(Cable 0.5 /24 AWG)
TERMINAL TYPE
CARD TYPE
SN708/709/712/741
ATTCON
(2-wire type ATTCON)
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
150 m (492 ft.)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
150 m (492 ft.)
PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)
600 m (1968 ft.)
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP and
PN-PW00 or
AC Adapter
300 m (984 ft.)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
and
PN-PW00
350 m (1148 ft.)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
and
AC Adapter
1200 m (3937 ft.)
SN716 DESKCON
44
REMARKS
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

This section explains the conditions for mounting circuit cards used in the system.
Circuit Card Mounting Slots

(1)
Regular PIM
Circuit Card Mounting Slots

PFT
MP12/FP12
LT11/AP11
LT10/AP10
LT09/AP09
LT08/AP08
LT07/AP07
LT06/AP06
LT05/AP05
LT04/AP04
LT03/AP03
LT02/AP02
LT01/AP01
AC/DC
PWR
LT00/AP00
VM
PIM
0-7
*3
*1
*2
LTC0
LTC1
DC/DC
PWR
LTC2
LTC3
BWB
FRONT
LT00-LT11 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots

AP00-AP11 : Application Processor card
mounting slots
MP12
: PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D
mounting slot
FP12
: PN-CP15 mounting slot
VM
: PZ-VM00/VM00-M/VM03-M/VM10-M mounting slot
PFT
: PZ-8PFTB mounting slot
AC/DC PWR : PZ-PW121/PW126 mounting slot
When using the A361 PIM-DC (PIM for 48 V
DC power supply system), this slot is used for
DC/DC PWR (PZ-PW135 mounting slot).
DC/DC PWR : PZ-PW122 mounting slot
When using the A361 PIM-DC (PIM for 48 V
DC power supply system), this slot is not used.
*1 PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D (MP) card is to be mounted in the MP12 slot of PIM0.

PZ-M606-A (ETHER) card is to be mounted on the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D (MP)
card.
PN-CP15 (FP) card is to be mounted in the FP12 slot of PIM2, 4, 6 according to the system configuration.
45
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

*2 Either line/trunk cards or application processor cards can be mounted in the LT00/AP00-LT11/
AP11 slots of PIM0-7.
For mounting condition of PN-RTA (RTA), refer to the In-Skin Router Installation Guide.
*3 When using PIM for 48 V DC power supply system, the AC/DC PWR slot is used for the DC/DC
PWR slot. And the DC/DC PWR slot is not used. The other slots can accommodate the same cards
as a usual PIM.
(2)
PIM for Backup CPU System
Circuit Card Mounting Slots (Backup CPU)

PFT
MP00
MP01
LT10/AP10
LT09/AP09
LT08/AP08
LT07/AP07
LT06/AP06
LT05/AP05
LT04/AP04
LT03/AP03
LT02/AP02
LT01/AP01
LT00/AP00
VM
PIM
(For
Backup
CPU)
AC/DC
PWR
*1
*2
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
LTC1
LTC2
LTC3
BWB
FRONT
LT00-LT10 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots

AP00-AP10 : Application Processor card
mounting slots
MP00/MP01 : PN-CP27-A /CP27-B mounting slots
VM
: PZ-VM00/VM00-M/VM03-M/VM10-M
mounting slot
PFT
: PZ-8PFTB mounting slot
AC/DC PWR : PZ-PW121/PW126 mounting slot
DC/DC PWR : PZ-PW122 mounting slot
*1 PN-CP27-A/CP27-B (MP1) card is to be mounted in the MP01 slot.

*2 PN-CP27-A/CP27-B (MP0) card is to be mounted in the MP00 slot.
*3 Either line/trunk cards or application processor cards can be mounted in the LT00/AP00-LT10/
AP10 slots.
For mounting condition of PN-RTA (RTA), refer to the In-Skin Router Installation Guide.
46
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

Mountable Slots According to Number of Ports

The PIM can mount 8-port or 16-port circuit cards.
Available slots are defined by the number of ports of the circuit card.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
P
F
T
V
M
8-port or 16-port circuit cards are mountable
See below.*
4-port circuit cards are mountable
In slot 08-11, 8-port circuit cards are not mountable. The number of physical ports which can be
provided by slot 08-11 depends on the number of ports of the circuit cards mounted in slot 04-07.
MOUNTING CIRCUIT
CARDS IN SLOT04-07
8-port circuit cards such as;
PN-8COT, PN-8DLC,
PN-8LC, PN-4DAT,
PN-CFTB, PN-2CSI
16-port circuit card;
PN-4CSI
MOUNTABLE CIRCUIT CARDS IN SLOT08-11 NOTE 1

Any application processor cards
4-port circuit cards NOTE 2 4-port line/trunk cards or any application processor cards
NOTE 1: For Backup CPU system, the circuit cards are mounted in slot 08 to 10.
NOTE 2: When PN-4LLCB (LLC) is used for controlling message waiting lamp, the card is to be mounted
in the LT00-LT07 (When PN-4LLCB is not used for controlling message waiting lamp, the card
can be mounted in the LT00-LT11.).
47
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

Control Card Mounting Conditions

(1)
Single CPU System

PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)
Mount the PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D card in the MP slot (slot 12) of PIM0.
PN-CP15 (FP)
When the system is configured with three PIMs or more, mount one PN-CP15 card in the FP slot
(slot 12) of PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
When the system is configured with one or two PIMs, the PN-CP15 card needs not to be mounted.
MP/FP Card Mounting Slots
PIM3
PIM2
PIM7
F
P
12
F
P
12
PIM1
PIM0
PIM6
PIM5
M
P
12
F
P
12
48
PIM4
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

(2)
Backup CPU System

PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)
Mount the PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B cards in the MP00 slot (slot 12) and MP01 slot (slot 11) of PIM0
for Backup CPU system.
PN-CP15 (FP)
When the system is configured with three PIMs or more, mount one PN-CP15 card in the FP slot
(slot 12) of PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
When the system is configured with one or two PIMs, the PN-CP15 card needs not to be mounted.
MP/FP Card Mounting Slots
PIM3
PIM2
PIM7
F
P
12
F
P
12
PIM1
PIM0
for
Backup
CPU
PIM6
PIM5
M M
P P
01 00
F
P
12
49
PIM4
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions

(1)
System Capacity for Application Processor Card

Maximum 24 cards per system
Maximum 256 ports per system
(2)
Mounting Application Processor Cards in PIM0-7

Use slots AP00 to AP11 to mount application processor cards in PIM0 through 7.
Application Processor Card Mounting Slots
PFT
MP12/FP12
AP11
AP10
AP09
AP08
AP07
AP06
AP05
AP04
AP03
AP02
AP01
AP00
VM
AC/DC
PWR
PIM
0-7
*
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
LTC1
LTC2
LTC3
BWB
FRONT
Application processor cards can be mounted in AP00 to AP11 slots.
NOTE:
Refer to the IP System Manual for the mounting condition of PN-24PRTA/PN-30PRTA/PNDTA/PN-DTB/PN-4RSTC-A card when building Remote PIM over IP.
50
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007

(3)
Mounting Application Processor Cards in PIM0 for Backup CPU System

Use slots AP00 to AP10 to mount application processor cards in PIM0.
Application Processor Card Mounting Slots (Backup CPU)
PFT
MP00
MP01
AP10
AP09
AP08
AP07
AP06
AP05
AP04
AP03
AP02
AP01
AP00
VM
PIM0
(For
Backup
CPU)
AC/DC
PWR
*1
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
LTC1
LTC2
LTC3
BWB
FRONT
Application processor cards can be mounted in AP00 to AP10 slots.
NOTE:
Refer to the IP System Manual for the mounting condition of PN-24PRTA/PN-30PRTA/PNDTA/PN-DTB/PN-4RSTC-A card when building Remote PIM over IP.
51
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007

(4)
Mounting Conditions of Each Card
CARD NAME
MOUNTING CONDITIONS
PN-PW00
No circuit card can be mounted in the adjoining left side slot because
one card occupies two physical slots width.
PN-BRTA
PN-2BRTC
PN-2BRTK
PN-4BRTA-A
PN-24CCTA
PN-30CCTA
PN-24DTA-C
PN-30DTC-C
PN-24PRTA
PN-30PRTA
PN-DTA
PN-DTB
Mount at least one card in PIM0 to receive source clock signals.
PZ-M542
PZ-M557
Mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card into any LTC connector of PIM

BWB.
Maximum of two cards can be mounted per PIM as follows:
LTC0 and LTC2
LTC0 and LTC3
LTC1 and LTC3
PN-4BRTA-A
Maximum of six cards can be mounted per PIM, maximum of 24 cards

per system. For the same number of slots as PN-4BRTA-A cards, only
line/trunk cards can be mounted in any slot of LT00-LT11 slots of each
PIM.
PN-8ETIA
[For North America/
Australia]
No circuit card can be mounted in the adjoining left side slot because
one card occupies two physical slots width.
52
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007

Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions

(1)
System Capacity for Line/Trunk Card

Maximum 128 ports per FP
Maximum 512 ports per system
(2)
Mounting Line/Trunk Cards in PIM0-7

Use slots LT00 to LT11 to mount line/trunk cards in PIM0 through 7.
Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots
PFT
MP12/FP12
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
VM
AC/DC
PWR
PIM
0-7
*1
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
LTC1
*2
LTC2
LTC3
BWB
FRONT
*1 8-port or 16-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT07 slots.

*2 4-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT11 slots.
53
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

(3)
Mounting Line/Trunk Cards in PIM0 for Backup CPU System

Use slots LT00 to LT10 to mount line/trunk cards in PIM0.
Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots (Backup CPU)
PFT
MP00
MP01
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
VM
PIM0
(For
Backup
CPU)
AC/DC
PWR
*1
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
LTC1
*2
LTC2
LTC3
BWB
FRONT
*1 8-port or 16-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT07 slots.

*2 4-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT10 slots.
54
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

(4)
Mounting Conditions of Each Card
CARD NAME
MOUNTING CONDITIONS
PN-32IPLA
PN-32IPLA-A
PN-16VCTA
PN-16VCTA-A
[For Series 3200 R6.2/R7
or earlier]
PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card is to be mounted in the

LT01 and/or LT05 slots of PIM0-7.
PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT) card is to be mounted in the
LT02, LT03 and/or LT06, LT07 slots of PIM0-7, next to the PN32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card. However, PN-16VCTA and
PN-16VCTA-A cards cannot be used together in a system.
One IP-PAD card requires two physical slots and two vacant slots.
When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT01 slot, the LT00 physical slot is required.
The LT02 and LT03 slots must be vacant except the 16VCT card or
application processor cards.
When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT05 slot, the LT04 physical slot is required.
The LT06 and LT07 slots must be vacant except the 16VCT card or
application processor cards.
When mounting the 16VCT card, use the vacant slot for the IP-PAD
card.
When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT01 slot, the first 16VCT
(VCT0) card is mounted in the LT02 and the second 16VCT
(VCT1) card is mounted in the LT03.
When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT05 slot, the first 16VCT
(VCT0) card is mounted in the LT06 and the second 16VCT
(VCT1) card is mounted in the LT07.
Do not mount any other L/T cards in the LT08-LT11 slots when you
mount the IP-PAD and 16VCT cards in the LT05-LT07 slots.
55
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CARD NAME
PN-32IPLA
PN-32IPLA-A
PN-16VCTA
PN-16VCTA-A
[For Series 3300 or later]
MOUNTING CONDITIONS
PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card is to be mounted in the
LT01 and/or LT05 slots of PIM0-7.
In the following cases, other L/T card and/or AP card can be
mounted in the adjoining left side slot of IP-PAD card.
IP-PAD
CARD
CHANNEL SLOT
NO.
NO.
16 CH
24 CH
32 CH
LT01
LT05
LT01
LT05
LT01
LT05
: ALLOWED -: NOT ALLOWED

OTHER LINE/TRUNK
CARDS
16VCT
CARD
LT02 LT03 LT06 LT07 LT02 LT03 LT06 LT07

NONE
NONE
NONE
24/32 LT01 TWO

CH LT05 CARDS
LT01
ONE
LT05 CARD
16 CH
APPLICATION PROCESSOR
CARDS
In the following cases, according as number of channels, do not

mount any other L/T cards in the LT08-LT11 slots when you mount
the IP-PAD card in the LT05 slot.
IP-PAD
CARD
CHANNEL SLOT
NO.
NO.
OTHER LINE/TRUNK
CARDS
LT08 LT09 LT10
CARDS
LT11
16 CH
24 CH LT05
NOTE
32 CH
LT08 LT09 LT10
LT11
NOTE
NOTE: For Backup CPU system, do not mount in the LT08-LT10

slots.
56
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CARD NAME
PN-8IPLA
MOUNTING CONDITIONS
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card is to be mounted in the LT00 and/or LT04
slots of PIM0-7.
In the following cases, other L/T card and/or AP card can be
mounted in the adjoining left side slot of IP-PAD card.
IP-PAD
CARD
24DSP
CARD
OTHER LINE/TRUNK
CARDS
CARDS
CHANNEL SLOT CHANNEL LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT

NO.
NO.
NO.
01 02 03 05 06 07 01 02 03 05 06 07
8 CH
16 CH
24 CH
32 CH
LT00
LT04
LT00
LT04
LT00
LT04
LT00
LT04
NONE
8 CH
16 CH
24 CH
In the following cases, according as number of channels, do not

mount any other L/T cards in the LT08-LT11 slots when you mount
the IP-PAD card in the LT04 slot.
IP-PAD
CARD
24DSP
CARD
OTHER LINE/TRUNK
CARDS
CARDS
LT11
LT11
CHANNEL SLOT CHANNEL
LT08 LT09 LT10
LT08 LT09 LT10
NO.
NO.
NO.
NOTE
NOTE
8 CH
16 CH
24 CH
32 CH
16 CH
24 CH
8 CH
LT04
NOTE: For Backup CPU system, do not mount in the LT08-LT10

slots.
57
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CARD NAME
MOUNTING CONDITIONS
PN-4CSIA
PN-4CSIA-A
Maximum of four cards can be mounted per PIM, maximum of 32

cards per system. PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A card is to be mounted only
in the even number slot of LT00-LT07. When PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIAA card is mounted in the LT00, LT02, LT04, LT06 slots, only application processor cards can be mounted in the LT01, LT03, LT05, LT07
slots which are the adjoining right side slots to the PN-4CSIA/PN4CSIA-A cards mounting slots.
NOTE 1
PN-4LLCB
When PN-4LLCB (LLC) is used for controlling message waiting

lamp, the card is to be mounted in the LT00-LT07 (When PN-4LLCB
is not used for controlling message waiting lamp, the card can be
mounted in the LT00-LT11.).
PN-4ODTA
When PN-4ODT card is mounted in the LT00-LT07 slots, allows all

speech lines to be accommodated from the BWB connector.
When PN-4ODTA card is mounted in the LT08-LT11 slots, since
speech lines circuit 2 and 3 cannot be accommodated from the
BWB connector, connect with the CN1 connector on the front side
of the card.
NOTE 1: When mounting the PN-4CSIA-A card to the PIM that the PN-4LDTA or PN-4LLCB card is
mounted, the mountable number of cards are limited as shown below.
Number of
PN-4CSIA-A Card
Number of PN-4LDTA/
PN-4LLCB Card
12
58
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

NOTE 2: The maximum DC power output of PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) card is 1.7 A.
When LT card (PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A/PN-4DLCT/PN-4LDTA/PN-4LLCB/PN-4ODTA*
card) that require the PZ-PW122 card is mounted, the sum current from each card to terminals
should be set to less than 1.7 A.
PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A/PN-4DLCT/PN-4LDTA/PN-4LLCB/PN-4ODTA card should be
mounted in the same PIM which accommodates PZ-PW122.
Current
(1 card)
The maximum
accommodation
number of cards
(1 PIM)
(1) PN-4CSIA/
PN-4CSIA-A
400 mA
(2) PN-4DLCT
180 mA
(3) PN-4LDTA
140 mA
12
(4) PN-4LLCB
140 mA
12
(5) PN-4ODTA*
500 mA
* When using the signaling type I.
Card
59
Accommodation
conditions
(1 PIM)
(1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)

1.7 A
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
60
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
This chapter explains how to install the PBX and the peripheral equipment,
system initialization and data entry, and operation test procedures you should
follow after completing the installation.
PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................
PROCEDURE ............................................................................
UNPACKING ..............................................................................
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS ..............................
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT ..................................
POWER CABLE CONNECTION ...............................................
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST ..............
BATTERY CONNECTION .........................................................
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF ......................................................
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF .....................................
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT ....................
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS ..................................................
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION .........................................................
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY ............................................................
OPERATION TEST ....................................................................
SYSTEM DATA SAVE ...............................................................
CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK ............................................
MOUNTING FRONT COVER .....................................................
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM ............................................................
61
62
72
75
76
82
111
121
129
137
144
173
275
277
278
280
281
281
282
283
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Grounding Requirements
The system grounding must have a specific ground resistance and AC noise level, and is to be connected
to a predetermined terminal in the PBX. Standard grounding requirements are as shown below:
Communication grounding: Less than 10
Protective ground for PIM : Less than 10
NOTE:
The AC ripple on these various grounds should be less than 1/2 Vp-p.
CAUTION
Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment.
Never operate this equipment with the grounding conductor disconnected.
The following specific requirements apply to ground wiring.
Install an equipment grounding conductor that is at least the same size as the ungrounded branchsupply conductors as part of the circuit that supplies the PBX. The main grounding conductor shall
be green with one or more yellow stripes. Or the equipment grounding conductors shall have a
continuous outer finish that is green. The equipment grounding connector is to be connected to
ground at the service equipment. For details of wiring connections, see WIRING POWER CABLE
TO TERMINALS.
Page 76
The attachment-plug receptacles near the PBX are all to be of a grounding type, and the equipment
grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service
equipment.
62
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
OCTOBER/19/2006
PRECAUTIONS
Static Electricity Guard

You must wear a grounded wrist strap to protect circuit cards from static electricity.

WHEN PLUGGING/UNPLUGGING A CIRCUIT CARD
PBX
FRAME GROUND SCREW

WRIST STRAP
WHEN HOLDING A CIRCUIT CARD

NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR
SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.
CARD FRONT
63
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS

WHEN MAKING A SWITCH SETTING ON A CIRCUIT CARD
CIRCUIT
CARD
WEAR A WRIST STRAP AND PERFORM
THE WORK ON A GROUNDED
CONDUCTIVE WORK SURFACE.
WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT CARD

CONDUCTIVE
POLYETHYLENE
BAG
CIRCUIT
CARD
WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT

CARD AROUND, KEEP THE
CARD IN A CONDUCTIVE
POLYETHYLENE BAG.
The mark shown below is attached to the sheet for the work in which circuit cards are handled. When
engaging in such work, the installer must be careful not to cause damage by static electricity.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
64
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS
Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards
CAUTION
Turn ON the MB switch on the IP-PAD/IPT card before the following operations:
- Resetting the MP (MP built-in FP)/FP card controlling the IP-PAD/4VCT cards
- Inserting or extracting the 16VCT/4VCT cards during data transmission
- Plugging or unplugging the BUS cable (IPT TRK BUS CA) between the IP-PAD and 16VCT/
IPT and 4VCT cards
After the above operations, turn OFF the MB switch.
Be sure to insert all of the 16VCT/4VCT cards firmly into their slots, which are connected to
the IP-PAD/IPT card by the BUS cable. Otherwise, the IP-PAD/IPT card connected to the
16VCT/4VCT card will not operate normally.
When removing a circuit card from the PIM or when mounting a circuit card in the PIM, follow the procedure given below.
65
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS
CIRCUIT CARD
PROCEDURE
PLUG
UNPLUG
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/
(1) Power off
PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)
PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)
(2) Plug in
PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)
(3) Power on
PZ-PW135 (PWR)
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
PZ-M623 (M623)
PZ-M649 (M649)
PZ-PW650 (RTA)
(1) Power off
(1) Power off

or MB
switch on
PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP) (1) Power off

PN-CP15 (FP)
or MB
PN-AP00-B (AP00/DBM)
switch on
PN-AP00-D (AP00)
PN-BRTA (BRT)
(2) Plug in
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
PN-2BRTK (BRT)
(3) Power on
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
or MB
PN-24CCTA (CCT)
switch off
PN-30CCTA (CCT)
PN-CFTC/PN-CFTC-A (CFT)
PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)
PN-DAIB (DAIB)
PN-DAIC (DAIC)
PN-DAID-A (DAID)
PN-DAIE (DAIE)
PN-DAIF (DAIF)
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
PN-8IPTA (SIP)
PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)
PN-IPTB (IPT)
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
PN-30PRTA (PRT)
(2) Unplug
CONDITION
These circuit cards must be
plugged in or unplugged only with
power off to prevent damage to the
card or other system circuitry.
(3) Power on
(2) Unplug

plugged in or unplugged under
Make Busy condition or power off
to prevent damage to the card or
other system circuitry.
(3) Power on

66
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006
PRECAUTIONS
CIRCUIT CARD
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH/
CCT/DTI/PRT)
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)
PN-4RSTB (MFR)
PN-4RSTC/
PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)
PN-2ILCC (ILC)
PN-SC00 (CCH)
PN-SC01 (DCH)
PN-SC03-B (CSH/ICH)
PN-SC03-C (CSH)
PZ-M542 (CONN)
PZ-M557 (CONN)
PN-RTA (RTA) NOTE
PZ-VM00/
PZ-VM00-M (VM00)
PZ-VM10-M (VM10)
PZ-VM01 (VM01)
PZ-VM03-M (VM03)
NOTE:
PROCEDURE
PLUG
UNPLUG
(1) Power off

or MB
switch on
(1) Power off

or MB
switch on
(2) Plug in
(2) Unplug
(3) Power on
or MB
switch off
(3) Power on
CONDITION
plugged in or unplugged under
Make Busy condition or power off
to prevent damage to the card or
other system circuitry.
It is allowed to plugging/unplugging PN-RTA (RTA) card, after flip the PWRSW switch to UP
position (Operating power is off).
67
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/15/2007
PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
1. You must hold the edge of a circuit card when plugging or unplugging the circuit card. If you
touch another area, you may be exposed to hazardous voltages.
PBX
NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.
CARD FRONT
2. You must wait for 30 seconds before plugging the circuit card again when unplugging the circuit card while the operating power is being supplied.
68
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006
PRECAUTIONS
Turning Power ON
<AC 120 V/240 V Power Supply System>
CAUTION
1. When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, do not plug/
unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.
2. When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control for the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of
PIM0 is off, no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switch(es) of other
PIMs are left on. Note, however, that the battery charging is continuing even under these circumstances.
3. Do not turn off the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on PIM1 to PIM7 when the system is operating.
(1)
Check the switch position of each PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card before turning power on.
Make sure that the AC120 V/240 V selector switch is positioned to appropriate voltage for each
country (AC120 V or AC240 V).
NOTE:
PZ-PW126 card does not have this switch.

SW2
100 V/120 V
240 V
Make sure that the battery mode selector switch is positioned as shown below to match the kind of
battery being used:
SW101
OFF
1 : Not used
1
2 : ON (SEAL/FLOAT2)
2
OFF (OPEN/FLOAT1)
ON
(2)
Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards to ON. First, turn ON PIM1 to PIM7.
Then, turn ON PIM0.
69
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS
<48 V DC Power Supply System>
CAUTION
1. When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW135 card, do not plug/unplug this
circuit card into/from its mounting slot.
2. When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control for the PZ-PW135 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is off,
no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switch(es) of other PIMs are
left on.
3. Do not turn off the PZ-PW135 card on PIM1 to PIM7 when the system is operating.
(1)
Check the switch position of each PZ-PW135 card before turning power on.
(2)
Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW135 cards to ON. First, turn ON PIM1 to PIM7. Then, turn
ON PIM0.
70
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS
Turning Power OFF

(1)
Before turning power off, inspect all line/trunk cards busy lamps to verify that no cards are
operating.
(2)
Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 or PZ-PW135 cards to OFF. First, turn OFF
PIM0. Then, turn OFF PIM1 to PIM7.
System Data Backup
CAUTION
If you operate the following without system data backup after system data setting or service
memory setting (registration of the features such as Call Forwarding and Speed Calling
[Speed Dialing] from a station), the data has been set is invalid.
You must execute the system data backup before the following operations.
-Turning Off the system
-System Initial (reset of MP card)
-Changing the MP card to Off-Line Mode
-Changing the MP card to On-Line Mode after system data setting under Off-Line Mode
You can execute the system data backup by the following two ways.
-Executing the system data backup once a day at the time set by CM43 Y=5>00
(If no data is set, the default setting is 3:00 a.m.)
-Executing the system data backup from MAT/CAT by CMEC Y=6>0:0
Do not reset the MP card, while SYSD lamp on the MP card is flashing.
71
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PROCEDURE
PROCEDURE
This flowchart explains the procedures for installing the PBX system. You should follow the procedure
shown below.
Procedure Flowchart
START
UNPACKING
Page 75
WIRING AC CABLE
TO
TERMINALS
Page 76
INSTALLATION
OF
MAIN EQUIPMENT
Page 82
POWER CABLE
CONNECTION
Page 111
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK

AND
HEAT RUN TEST
Page 121
BATTERY
CONNECTION
Page 129
CABLE RUNNING
TO MDF
Page 137
TERMINATION OF
CABLES ON MDF
Page 144
INSTALLATION
OF
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
SWITCH SETTINGS
OF
CIRCUIT CARDS
Page 173
REFER TO CHAPTER 3
Page 289
72
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PROCEDURE
Procedure Flowchart
A
MOUNTING
CIRCUIT CARDS
Page 275
SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION
Page 277
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY
Page 278
OPERATION TEST
Page 280
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
Page 281
CLEANING
AND
VISUAL CHECK
Page 281
MOUNTING FRONT COVER
Page 282
END
For Floor Standing Installation, there are three kinds of method to install the equipment. It depends on the
country according to the UL/cUL/ACA.
NOTE:
UL = Underwriters Laboratories (U.S.A.)

cUL = Canadian Underwriters Laboratories (Canada)
ACA = Australian Communication Authority (Australia)
Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin America, Australia)

Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin America, Australia)
Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe, Middle East)
See next page.
73
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PROCEDURE
Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin America, Australia)

The equipment is placed on the BASE TRAY which is fixed on the floor, and is connected to 120 V/240 V
AC Power Source using AC CORD-D cable.
For installation of Stationary Equipment, see the following pages.
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using AC CORD-D
Page 76
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE TRAY
Page 86
- Installation of Module, For Stationary
Equipment
Page 83
Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin America, Australia)

The equipment is fixed on the floor by BASE PLATE and anchor bolts, and is connected to AC Power
Distribution Board using installation cable.
For installation of this equipment, see the following pages.
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using Installation Cable
Page 78
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE PLATE
Page 86
- Installation of Module, For Fixed Equipment
Page 83
Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe, Middle East)

The equipment is fixed on the floor by BASE PLATE and anchor bolts, and is connected to 120 V/240 V
AC Power Source using AC CORD-D cable.
For installation of this equipment, see the following pages.
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using AC CORD-D
Page 76
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE PLATE
Page 86
- Installation of Module, For Fixed Equipment
Page 83
74
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
UNPACKING
UNPACKING
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
(1)
Check the received quantity of packages containing the PBX system with the description on the
shipping document.
(2)
Check the packaging for external damage done by transportation and record it as necessary.
(3)
Unpack the packaging.

For unpacking the packages containing circuit cards, a grounded wrist strap should be worn.
(4)
Check the quantity of equipment and materials unpacked with the shipping document.
(5)
Perform visual inspection, checking for the following items.

Modules
Overall distortion.
Scratches and dents on the surface.
Scratches and cracks on the PIM Backplane.
Broken or bent pins on the PIM Backplane.
Covers
Scratches and dents.
Circuit Cards
Overall distortion
Scratches and cracks
Loss, or damage of parts on the circuit cards.
Attendant Console
Scratches and cracks on the keyboard

Overall distortion
Damage to Keys and lamps.
75
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System
There are two kinds of Power cable : AC CORD-D for Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin
America, Australia)/Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe,
Middle East)
: Installation Cable for Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin
America, Australia)
Using AC CORD-D
(1) Take the AC CORD-D out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the code to the
BASE with the cord bush.
NOTE: Cord bush is attached to the AC CORD-D.
(2) Wire the AC CORD-D and the FG cable to the FG, NEUTRAL, LINE and Ground terminals on the BASE.
(3) Wire the AC CORD-B to the FG, NEUTRAL and LINE terminals on the BASE.
Wiring AC CORD to Terminals when AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System

NOTE 1: For grounding requirements, refer to PRECAUTIONS.
Page 62
NOTE 2: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia and Europe.
BASE
TO CN1 on
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 in PIM
FG CABLE
AC CORD-B
(GREEN)
WHITE (BLUE)
BLACK (BROWN)
GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
FG
NEUTRAL
TO
120 V/240 V
AC POWER
SOURCE
LINE
BLACK (BROWN)
GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)
WHITE (BLUE)
AC CORD-D (3.5 m)
2
HOW TO SECURE CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK

1
1 INSERT A SCREW DRIVER INTO THE INSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
2 PULL DOWN THE SCREW DRIVER TOWARD INSIDE AND OPEN THE METAL PLATE.
3 INSERT A POWER CABLE INTO THE OUTSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
4 REMOVE THE SCREW DRIVER.
FRONT

76
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/15/2007
(4) When the system is two-frame configuration, the AC CORD-D of the right side frame can go
through the BASE of the left side frame.
AC CORD Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration when AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System
TO
120 V/240 V AC
POWER SOURCE
AC CORD-D
BASE
CORD BUSH
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
FG
NEUTRAL
LINE
77
FG
NEUTRAL
LINE
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Using Installation Cable

(1) Take the Installation cable out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the cable to
the BASE with the cord bush.
NOTE: The installer is to use minimum 16 AWG (1.3 ) size wire, maximum 9 mm size cable.
(2) Wire the Installation cable and the FG cable to the FG, NEUTRAL, LINE and Ground terminals
on the BASE.
(3) Wire the AC CORD-B to the FG, NEUTRAL and LINE terminals on the BASE.
Wiring Installation Cable to Terminals when AC120 V/ 240 V Power Supply System
NOTE:
Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.

BASE
TO CN1 on
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 in PIM
FG CABLE
AC CORD-B
(GREEN)
WHITE (BLUE)
BLACK (BROWN)
GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
FG
NEUTRAL
TO AC
POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD
LINE
BLACK (BROWN)
WHITE (BLUE)
GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)
INSTALLATION CABLE

1
FRONT
78
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
(4) When the system is two-frame configuration, the Installation cable of the right side frame can go
Installation Cable Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration when AC120 V/ 240 V Power Supply System
TO
AC POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD
INSTALLATION CABLE
BASE
CORD BUSH
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
FG
NEUTRAL
LINE
79
FG
NEUTRAL
LINE
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
48 V DC Power Supply System

(1)
Take the Installation cable out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the cable to the
BASE with the cord bush.
NOTE: The installer is to use minimum 16 AWG (1.3 ) size wire, maximum 9 mm size cable.
(2) Wire the Installation cable and the FG cable to the 48 V, G, FG and Ground terminals on the BASE.
(3) Wire the AC CORD-B to the 48 V, G and FG terminals on the BASE.
Wiring AC CORD to Terminals when 48 V DC Power Supply System

NOTE:
Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.

BASE
TO DC INPUT on
PZ-PW135 in PIM
FG CABLE
(GREEN)
AC CORD-B
BLACK (BROWN)
GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)
GREEN (GREEN/YELLOW)
WHITE
(BLUE)
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
-48 V
FG
TO
48 V DC
POWER
SOURCE
INSTALLATION
CABLE NOTE
2
WHITE (BLUE)

1

BLACK
(BROWN)
OUTSIDE
HOLE

FRONT
NOTE:
The installation cable fixes to the BASE using a tie wrap so that it may not escape from outside
hole of terminal block, even if an installation cable is pulled.
80
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
(4)
When the system is two-frame configuration, the Installation cable of the right side frame can go
Installation Cable Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration when 48 V DC Power Supply System
TO
48 V DC
POWER SOURCE
INSTALLATION CABLE
BASE
CORD BUSH
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
48 V
FG
81
48 V
FG
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Start
Checkup
before installation
Marking
Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that the
required floor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts for trunk/
extension cables, power cables and bus cables have been properly worked at
correct positions. See Floor Space and Cable Hole Location.
Page 84, Page 85
Mark positions for installation of the PBX main equipment.
For Fixed Equipment, detach the BASE PLATE from the BASE. See Floor
Marking for BASE PLATE.
Page 86
For Stationary Equipment, see Floor Marking for BASE TRAY.
Page 86
Leveling
NOTE:
Drilling
First open necessary number of preliminary prepared holes using the drill bit
for small-diameter holes, then use the finishing drill bit for finishing drill holes.
See Drilling.
Page 87
Detaching Front Cover
Measure the level of the floor surface before installing the PBX main
equipment.
Check the level of the floor. If necessary, adjust the level by inserting spacers
beneath the equipment.
Detach the front cover of each Module. See Detaching FRONT COVER.
Page 88
82
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Installation of Module
Installation of
Multiple-Module
Installation of
Top Cover
Installation of
Mounting Bracket
Checking
For Fixed Equipment

(1) Fix the BASE PLATE to the floor with anchor bolts.
(2) Fix the BASE to the BASE PLATE with screws. See Connection of BASE
and BASE PLATE.
Page 91
(3) Fix the Module onto the BASE with screws. See Connection of Module
and BASE.
Page 92
For Stationary Equipment
(1) Fix the BASE TRAY to the floor with anchor bolts.
(2) Fix the Module onto the BASE with screws. See Connection of Module
and BASE.
Page 92
(3) Place the Module and the BASE on the BASE TRAY. See Placing Module
on BASE TRAY.
Page 93
Connect Modules with screws. See Connection of Modules.
Page 94
Install the I/F BRACKET to the top-stack PIMs if the equipment is stacked with
five or more Modules. See Installation of I/F BRACKET.
Page 97
Install the TOP COVER to the top-stack PIM. See Installation of TOP COVER.
Page 98
Install the MOUNTING BRACKET to the top-stack PIM if the equipment is
stacked with four or more Modules. See Installation of MOUNTING
BRACKET.
Page 99
Carefully review every step above to check that all necessary screws have been
properly placed and tightened.
End
83
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Floor Space
UNIT : mm (inch)
223 (8.8)
430 (16.9)
200 (7.9)
1000 (39.4)
MAINTENANCE
AREA
200 (7.9)
PIM/BATTM
BASE
FRONT
84
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Cable Hole Location
MODULE
BASE
FRONT
: CABLE HOLE
85
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Floor Marking for BASE PLATE

(for Fixed Equipment)
Using MOUNTING BRACKET
: 10 (0.4)
Not Using MOUNTING BRACKET : 1.7 (0.1)
3.2
(0.2)
UNIT : mm (inch)
(WALL)
Outline of
Module
40.6
(1.6)
202.6
(7.9)
128
(5.6)
ANCHOR BOLT 4
34
(1.3)
20.4
(0.8)
30
30
(1.2)
(1.2)
347.2 (13.7)
407.2 (16.0)
412.4 (16.0)
8.8
(0.3)
8.8
(0.3)
Floor Marking for BASE TRAY

(for Stationary Equipment)
ANCHOR BOLT 4
45
(1.8)
128
(5.0)
UNIT : mm (inch)
43.9
347.2
(1.7)
(13.7)
86
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Drilling
(1) Make a preliminary hole in the concrete, using a drill bit for small-diameter holes.
(2) Drill a hole in the concrete with a drill suitable for a plug bolt a little deeper than the plug bolt
length.
Anchor Bolt Size :10 mm (0.39 inch) DIA for Fixed Equipment
6 mm (0.24 inch) DIA for Stationary Equipment
(3) Insert the anchor bolt into the hole.
(4) Push anchor bolt until the bolt stays permanently in place.
(5) Turn bolt counterclockwise and remove.
(6) Insert bolts correctly into the holes for equipment installation, then tighten them properly.
Drilling Instructions for Anchor Bolt

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
87
(5)
(6)
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Detaching FRONT COVER

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Push portion A of the COVER PARTS to release the LATCH.

Pivot the COVER PARTS on its left side to remove it.
Loosen its one screw.
Lift up the STOPPER to unlock.
Pivot the FRONT COVER on its bottom to remove it.
Detaching FRONT COVER

(1)
PUSH COVER PARTS.
COVER PARTS
PUSH
PORTION A
(2)
REMOVE COVER PARTS.
88
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
(3)
LOOSEN A SCREW.
(4)
LIFT UP STOPPER (UNLOCK).
89
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
(5)
REMOVE FRONT COVER.
90
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE for Fixed Equipment

(1) Mount the BASE on the BASE PLATE by placing it over the hooks.
(2) Slide the BASE into the inner end.
(3) Secure the BASE to the BASE PLATE with two screws.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the BASE PLATE.
Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE
BASE
HOOKS
FRONT
BASE PLATE
BASE
SLIDE BASE INTO INNER END.
BASE PLATE
91
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Connection of Module and BASE for Fixed/Stationary Equipment

(1) Mount the Module on the BASE by placing it over the hooks.
(2) Slide the Module into the inner end.
NOTE: Pay attention to do not put the Module on Edging of the cable hole on BASE.
(3) Secure the Module to the BASE with three screws.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the Module.
Connection of Module and BASE
SCREWS
BASE
HOOKS
MODULE
SLIDE MODULE INTO

INNER END.
BASE
92
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Placing Module on BASE TRAY for Stationary Equipment

Place the Module and the BASE on the BASE TRAY.
Placing Module on BASE TRAY
BASE TRAY
93
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Connection of Modules
NOTE:
The FRONT STOPPER, BUILD PLATES, and screws are attached to the Module.
(1) Insert the BUILD PLATES (R)/(L) into the slits of the SIDE FRAME, then slide them backward
and lock them.
(2) Place the FRONT STOPPER on the Module, then fix it with three screws.
Connection of BUILD PLATE

BUILD PLATE (R)
BUILD PLATE (L)
SIDE FRAME
94
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Connection of FRONT STOPPER

FRONT
STOPPER
PZ-PW121
SCREW
PIM TOP FRAME
SCREW
SCREW
PIM SIDE FRAME
FRONT STOPPER
SCREWS
95
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
(3) Hook the PIM onto the BUILD PLATEs hooks.

(4) Slide the PIM backward until it comes to the back end.
(5) Fix the PIM with three screws.
Connection of Modules
SCREWS
96
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Installation of I/F BRACKET

Install the I/F BRACKET to the top-stack PIMs when the equipment is two frame stacks.
Secure the I/F BRACKET to rear side of top-stack PIMs with two screws from inside of PIMs.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the I/F BRACKET.
FRONT SIDE
SCREW
SCREW
I/F BRACKET
97
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Installation of TOP COVER

(1) Hang four hooks of the TOP COVER on the back board of PIM as shown below.
(2) Secure the TOP COVER to the front side of the PIM with two screws.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to BASE/TOP ASSEM.
HOOK
98
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET

Install the MOUNTING BRACKET to the top-stack PIM if the equipment is stacked with four or
more Modules.
(1) Remove four screws located on the rear side of the top-stack PIM.
(2) Secure the MOUNTING BRACKET to the PIM with the removed screws.
(3) Secure the PIM to the wall or ceiling by using wires, chains and eyebolts (locally provided).
Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET

FRONT
PIM
SCREWS
MOUNTING BRACKET
30
37
43
0(
11
.7)
8(
0(
14
.7)
16
.9)
47 (1.8)
UNIT : mm (inch)
99
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

Start
Checkup
before installation
Detaching
Front Cover
Marking
Installation of Module
extension cables, power cables and grounding conductors have been properly
worked at correct positions. See Floor Space and Cable Hole Location.
Page 84, Page 85
Detach the front cover of each Module. See Detaching FRONT
COVER.
Page 88
Mark hole positions for installation of the PBX main equipment. See Wall
Marking for HANGER ASSEM.
Page 101
Secure the HANGER ASSEM to the wall.
Hang the PIM to the HANGER ASSEM. See Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM.
Page 102
NOTE: The BATTM cannot be installed on the wall.
Multiple-Module
Configuration
After hanging each PIM to the respective HANGER ASSEMs, connect PIMs
using screws. See Connection of Modules.
Page 94
Checking
End
100
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Wall Marking for HANGER ASSEM

(7.0)
352
352
(13.9)
352
(13.9)
352
(13.9)
(14.0)
ANCHOR/
SCREW
356.5
(8.3)
(8.3)
(8.3)
(8.3)
210.8
210.8
210.8
210.8
(13.9)
(7.0)
UNIT : mm (inch)
(8.3)
167.5
210.8
167.5
( 3/PIM)
HANGER ASSEM
BASE
101
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM

(1) Secure the HANGER ASSEM to the surface of a wall with three screws.
Select screws to match with the wall type as follows.
WALL TYPE
RECOMMENDED SCREW
CONCRETE
ANCHOR BOLT TYPE
Recommended 4 mm (0.16 inch)

by 25 mm (0.98 inch)
WOOD
WOOD TYPE SCREWS
Minimum 3.5 mm (0.14 inch) DIA

Maximum 4.5 mm (0.17 inch) DIA
PLASTER BOARD
MOLLY ANCHOR TYPE
[THICKNESS Minimum 9.6 mm (0.38 inch)]
Minimum 3.5 mm (0.14 inch) DIA

Maximum 4.5 mm (0.17 inch) DIA
A concrete wall is recommended because it is the most firm to mount the PBX of the three. The
plaster board is the most infirm wall of the three.
(2) Hang the slits of the rear of a PIM to the hooks of the HANGER ASSEM.
(3) Secure the PIM to the HANGER ASSEM with two screws.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the HANGER ASSEM.
Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM
HANGER ASSEM
HOOK
HOOK
PIM
BASE
SCREWS
FRONT
102
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

Start
Checkup
before installation
Detaching
Side Cover/Side Panel
One PIM
Configuration
Multiple-Module
Configuration
Checking
extension cables, power cables and grounding conductors have been properly
worked at correct positions. See Floor Space and Cable Hole Location.
Page 84, Page 85
Detach the SIDE COVER and SIDE PANEL of the Module for 19RACK
BRACKET (A) mounting. For 19RACK BRACKET (B), this procedure is not
required. See Detaching SIDE COVER/SIDE PANEL.
Page 104
Mount the 19RACK BRACKET (A) to the PIM. See Connection of
19RACK BRACKET (A).
Page 106
Mount the PIM with the 19RACK BRACKET (A) to the 19-inch RACK. See
Mounting PIM to 19-inch RACK.
Page 107
Mount the 19RACK BRACKET (B) to the bottom-stack Module. See Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (B).
Page 108
Mount the 19RACK BRACKET (A) to the top-stack PIM. See Connection
of 19RACK BRACKET (A).
Page 106
Mount the modules with the 19 RACK BRACKET (A) and (B) to the 19-inch
RACK. See Mounting Multiple-Module to 19-inch RACK.
Page 109
NOTE: The BATTM cannot be installed in the 19-inch RACK.
End
103
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006
Detaching SIDE COVER/SIDE PANEL

(1) Remove the two screws fixing the SIDE COVER.
(2) Pivot the SIDE COVER on its bottom to remove it.
(3) Remove the SIDE PANEL fixed by three screws, from the left side frame of the PIM.
Detaching SIDE COVER
SCREW
SIDE COVER
104
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Detaching SIDE PANEL
SCREWS
SIDE PANEL
105
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (A)

(1) Insert the nails of the 19RACK BRACKET (A) into the side frame of the Module.
(2) Secure them with four screws each.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the 19RACK BRACKET (A).
Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (A)

19RACK BRACKET (A)
SCREWS
NAILS
106
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Mounting PIM to 19-inch RACK

(1) Mount the PIM with 19RACK BRACKET (A) into the 19-inch RACK.
(2) Secure them with four screws (locally provided).
Mounting PIM to 19-inch Rack

SCREWS
19RACK BRACKET (A)

NOTE
NOTE:
The BATTM cannot be installed in the 19-inch RACK.
107
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006
Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (B)

(1) Place the BASE PLATE on the 19RACK BRACKET (B).
(2) Secure the BASE PLATE with four washer and nuts.
(3) Mount the BASE to the BASE PLATE.
(See Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE.
Page 91)
(4) Mount the Module to the BASE.
(See Connection of Module and BASE.
Page 92)
NOTE:
Nuts and washers are attached to the 19RACK BRACKET (B).
Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (B)
NUT
WASHER
19RACK BRACKET (B)
BASE PLATE
108
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Mounting Multiple-Module to 19-inch RACK
19BRACKET (A)
19BRACKET (B)
109
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
BUS Cable Connection

When the system is a multiple-PIM configuration, connect all the BUS Connector to each other using BUS
cables, as shown below.
Be sure to secure the BUS cables using tie wraps to avoid obstructing a PFT card.
BUS Cable
700 mm (27.6 inch)
48-TW-0.7 CONN CA
Connection of BUS Cables

BUS CABLE
P
W
R
P
W
R
PIM7
PIM2
P
W
R
P
W
R
PIM6
PIM1
P
W
R
P
W
R
PIM5
PIM0
P
W
R
P
W
R
PIM4
PIM3
PZ-8PFTB
CARD
TIE WRAP
FRONT
48-TW-0.7 CONN CA
110
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

The cable connections on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card are shown below.

Cable Connection on PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
NOTE 1: Follow the Label on Front Plate of PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126.
NOTE 2: If GND (Signal GND) has to be separated from FG (Frame GND), remove the link between
GND and FG terminals.
NOTE 3: In Australia, GND and FG are bonded elsewhere, so are not to be linked here. The TRC Earth
connects to the GND terminal on every PIM.
NOTE 4: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.
NOTE 5: PZ-PW126 card does not have SW2.
SW101
OFF
MJ
12
ON
1: OFF: NO CONNECTION
2: ON: SEAL/FLOAT2
OFF: OPEN/FLOAT1
PWR CNT CA-D (for PIM1 to PIM7)

PWR CNT CA-E (for PIM0)
MN
ON
NOTE 1
SW101
CN103
TO PWR1 CONNECTOR ON BWB
TO PWR0A CONNECTOR ON BWB
27 V
TO AUXILIARY
EQUIPMENT
FG
TO PWR0B CONNECTOR ON BWB
CN104
GND NOTE 2
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, 27 V, E)

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90 V, CR, E)
CAUTION
PWR CA-A
Set the appropriate voltage

before turning on the SW1
switch.
TO OTHER PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
100 V /120 V
240 V
SW2
TO BATTERY OR OTHER PZ-PW121/
PZ-PW126
CN1
WHITE (BLUE)
O I
BLACK (BROWN)
SW1
PWR CA-A/BATT CA
TO
FRAME GROUND TERMINAL
IN PIM
L
N
FG
NOMINAL
AC INPUT
TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE
AC CORD-B
111
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Connection of AC CORD-B
(1) Connect the AC CORD-B to the CN1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.
(2) Screw the ground cable of the AC CORD-B to the frame ground terminal on the PIM.
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
TO 120 V/240 V AC POWER SOURCE

AC CORD-D
CN1
CORD BUSH
BASE
AC CORD-B
FRONT
TERMINAL BLOCKS
112
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Connection of DC Power Cable

(1) Confirm the connection of power output cables, as shown below (These cables are pre-installed).
(2) For PIM0, connect the PWR CNT CA-E to the CN103 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
card and the PWR1 connector on the BWB.
For PIM1 to PIM7, connect the PWR CNT CA-D to the CN103 connector on the PZ-PW121/
PZ-PW126 card and the PWR1 connector on the BWB.
PWR CNT CA-D/PWR CNT CA-E
250 mm (9.8 inch)
300 mm (11.8 inch)

550 mm (21.7 inch)
Cable Connection between PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 and BWB

PIM
PZ-PW121
/PZ-PW126
BWB (BACK WIRING BOARD)

PWR1
CN103
PWR0A
PWR0B
CARD SLOT AREA
PWR0C
LTC CONNECTOR AREA

PWR CNT CA-E (FOR PIM0)
PWR CNT CA-D (FOR PIM1 TO PIM7)
113
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
(3) When you need a 48 V DC power supply installed for a Cell Station (Zone Transceiver) in WCS
system or when PN-4LDT, PN-4LLC card is installed, do the following procedure. If not, skip
this procedure and go to (4).
Page 116
STEP1: Attach four screws preliminary to the PZ-PW122 card.
STEP2: Mount the PZ-PW122 card into the PIM which accommodates the CSI, 4LDT, 4LLC
cards, and fasten the screws.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the PZ-PW122 card.
Mounting PZ-PW122 into PIM
PIM
PZ-PW122
114
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
STEP3: Connect the PWR CNT CA-E or PWR CNT CA-D, and POWER OUTPUT CABLE
(48 V, E) as shown below.
Cable Connection between PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126/PZ-PW122 and BWB

PIM
PZ-PW121
/PZ-PW126

PWR1
PWR0A
CN103
PWR0B
CARD SLOT AREA
PWR0C
LTC CONNECTOR AREA
NOTE
PZ-PW122
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, -27 V, E)
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (-48 V, E)
NOTE:
When the PN-4LLC card is used for OPS in North America, Ferrite Core must be attached
to the POWER OUTPUT CABLE (48 V, E) between the PZ-PW122 card and the PWR0C
connector on BWB of the PIM, as shown below.
PZ-PW122
PWR0C
GRAY
RED
YELLOW
FERRITE CORE
115
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
(4)
When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
cards to each other using the PWR CA-A for power multi-connection.
PWR CA-A
550 mm (21.7 inch)
PWR CA-A
Connection of PWR CA-A Cables

(a) When using an Internal Battery
PWR
PWR
PWR
CA-A
PWR
CA-A
PIM3
PIM7
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR
PIM2
PIM6
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR
PWR
PWR
CA-A
PWR
CA-A
PIM1
PIM5
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR
PIM4
PIM0
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
116
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Connection of PWR CA-A Cables

(b) When using an External Battery
PWR
PWR
PIM3
PIM7
PWR
PWR
CA-A
PWR
PIM2
PWR
CA-A
PIM6
PWR
PWR
PIM1
PIM5
PWR
PWR
PIM4
PIM0
TO EXTERNAL BATTERY
117
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

Cable Connection on PZ-PW135
NOTE 1: Follow the Label on Front Plate of PZ-PW135.
NOTE 2: If GND (Signal GND) has to be separated from FG (Frame GND), remove the link between
GND and FG terminals.
NOTE 3: In Australia, GND and FG are bonded elsewhere, so are not to be linked here. The TRC Earth
connects to the GND terminal on every PIM.
NOTE 4: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.
MJ
MN
ON
PWR CNT CA-D (for PIM1 to PIM7)

PWR CNT CA-E (for PIM0)
TO PWR1 CONNECTOR ON BWB
SIG
TO AUXILIARY
EQUIPMENT
27 V
TO PWR0A CONNECTOR ON BWB
FG
TO PWR0B CONNECTOR ON BWB
GND

PWR CA-A
TO PWR0C CONNECTOR (48 V, E) ON BWB
BLACK (BROWN)
O I
48 V
DC INPUT
G
WHITE (BLUE)
SW
TO
FRAME GROUND TERMINAL
IN PIM
48 V
G
FG
TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE
AC CORD-B
118
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
(1)
(2)
Connect the AC CORD-B to the DC INPUT connector on the PZ-PW135 card.

Screw the ground cable of the AC CORD-B to the frame ground terminal on the PIM.
PZ-PW135
TO 48 V DC POWER SOURCE
INSTALLATION CABLE
DC INPUT
CORD BUSH
BASE
(SN1685
BASEUC)
AC CORD-B
FRONT
TERMINAL BLOCKS
119
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Connection of DC Power Cable

(1)
(2)
Confirm the connection of power output cables, as shown below (These cables are pre-installed).
For PIM0, connect the PWR CNT CA-E to the SIG connector on the PZ-PW135 card and the
PWR1 connector on the BWB.
For PIM1 to PIM7, connect the PWR CNT CA-D to the SIG connector on the PZ-PW135 card
and the PWR1 connector on the BWB.
PWR CNT CA-D/PWR CNT CA-E
250 mm (9.8 inch)
300 mm (11.8 inch)

550 mm (21.7 inch)
Cable Connection between PZ-PW135 and BWB

PIM
PZ-PW135

PWR1
SIG
PWR0A
PWR0B
CARD SLOT AREA
PWR0C
LTC CONNECTOR AREA

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (48 V, E)
120
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Precautions
(1)
NOTE:
Check the switch position of each PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card before turning power on.
- Make sure that the AC120 V/240 V selector switch is positioned to appropriate voltage for
each country (AC120 V or AC240 V).
PZ-PW126 card does not have this switch.
SW2
100 V/120 V
240 V
- Make sure that the battery mode selector switch is positioned as shown below to match the
kind of battery being used:
SW101
OFF
1 : Not used
1
2 : ON (SEAL/FLOAT2)
2
OFF (OPEN/FLOAT1)
ON
(2)
When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, do not plug/
unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.
(3)
Immediately follow the instructions below if the MJ lamp on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 lights
up or smoke or a nasty smell is produced during the test:
a) Turn power off of all PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
b) Unplug the AC code from the wall outlet.
c) Carefully check for causes of the failure occurring.
NOTE:
(4)
Do not turn power on again until the cause is detected.

When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control
for the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is
off, no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switches of other PIMs are
left on. Note, however, that the battery charging is continuing even under these circumstances.
121
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Power Routing
NOTE 1: PN-4LCD/4LCF/4LCL/4LCW card provides +80 V on-board power supply (+80 VOBP).
NOTE 2: PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN, PN-2LDTA, PN-2ODTA/2ODTB card provides 48 V on-board power supply (48 VOBP).
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
TO PIM2
+5 V
PIM1
-27 V
-27 V
CR
+90 V
AC
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
PWR CA-A
NOTE 1
+5 V
+5 V
+80 VOBP
BATTERY
-27 V
-27 V
CR
+80 V
PIM0
-27 V
-5 V
CR
AC
+90 V
NOTE 2
-5 V
+5 V
-48 VOBP
AC CORD-B
-48 V
-27 V
CR
PN-8LCAA
+5 V
-27 V
-5 V
CR
+90 V
AC CORD-D
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
TO AC MAINS INPUT
122
BASE
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Checking for Supply Voltage

Start
Checking power cable
and
grounding conductor
Testing for input power
Connecting AC power
Turning power ON
Verifying power
pilot lamp ON
Testing for
output voltage
Before connecting AC Cord, verify:

- that the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card is positioned to OFF;
- that the AC Cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.
Use a tester to verify that the input power is AC12010 V or AC24010 V.
Plug the AC cord into a wall outlet.
Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards on PIM1 to

PIM7 to ON. Then, turn the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on
PIM0 to ON last of all.
Verify that the ON lamp on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card lights up.
Measure the output voltage: 20 V should be observed at GND and

27 V terminals of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card. See Confirming Output
Voltage.
Page 124
End
Heat Run Test

Turn the SW1 switch ON. Keep it on for 5 minutes to check for no abnormal voltage. After completing the test, turn OFF the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on PIM0. Then, turn OFF
the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
123
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Confirming Output Voltage

TESTER
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
DC100 V
MJ
MN
ON
-27 V
FG
GND
O I
SW1
TO
FRAME GROUND
TERMINAL IN PIM
TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE
124
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

Precautions
(1)
When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW135 card, do not plug/unplug this
circuit card into/from its mounting slot.
(2)
Immediately follow the instructions below if the MJ lamp on the PZ-PW135 lights up or smoke
or a nasty smell is produced during the test:
a) Turn power off of all PZ-PW135 cards.
b) Unplug the DC code from the wall outlet.
c) Carefully check for causes of the failure occurring.
NOTE:
(3)
Do not turn power on again until the cause is detected.

When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control
for the PZ-PW135 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is off, no
power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switches of other PIMs are left on.
125
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Power Routing
NOTE 1: PN-4LCD/4LCF/4LCL/4LCW card provides +80 V on-board power supply (+80 VOBP).
NOTE 2: PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN, PN-2LDTA, PN-2ODTA/2ODTB card provides 48 V on-board power supply (48 VOBP).
PZ-PW135
TO PIM2
+5 V
PIM1
-27 V
CR
-48 V
DC IN
PZ-PW135
NOTE 1
+5 V
+5 V
+80 VOBP
-27 V
+80 V
PIM0
-27 V
CR
-5 V
CR
DC IN
-48 V
NOTE 2
-5 V
+5 V
-48 VOBP
AC CORD-B
-48 V
-27 V
CR
INSTALLATION
CABLE
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
126
BASE
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Checking for Supply Voltage

Start
Checking power cable
and
grounding conductor
Testing for input power
Before connecting DC Cord, verify:

- that the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW135 card is positioned to OFF;
- that the DC Cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.
Use a tester to verify that the input power is 48 V DC on the output of external
48 V DC Power Supply (Rectificador), or the Power Supply Cable (Installation Cable).
Connecting DC power
Connect the Power Supply Cable (Installation Cable) to Terminal Blocks on

BASE.
Turning power ON
Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW135 cards on PIM1 to PIM7 to ON.
Then, turn the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW135 card on PIM0 to ON last of all.
Verifying power
pilot lamp ON
Testing for
output voltage
Verify that the ON lamp on the PZ-PW135 card lights up.
Measure the output voltage: 20 V should be observed at GND and

27 V terminals of the PZ-PW135 card. See Confirming Output
Voltage.
Page 124
End
Heat Run Test

Turn the SW1 switch ON. Keep it on for 5 minutes to check for no abnormal voltage. After completing the test, turn OFF the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW135 card on PIM0. Then, turn OFF the SW1
switches of all the PZ-PW135 cards.
127
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Confirming Output Voltage

TESTER
PZ-PW135
DC100 V
MJ
MN
ON
-27 V
FG
GND
O I
SW
TO
FRAME GROUND
TERMINAL IN PIM
TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE
128
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
BATTERY CONNECTION
BATTERY CONNECTION
WARNING
TURN OFF AC POWER BEFORE CONNECTING BATTERIES.
CAUTION
1. 24 V batteries must be used in this system.
2. If battery terminals (+, ) come in contact with the module while connecting the battery cable
to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card or the BWB may be broken. Therefore, you must perform work in accordance with the following steps when mounting or removing the batteries.
(1) When mounting batteries:
(a) Connect the battery cable to the batteries.
(b) Mount the batteries into the appointed position of the PIM or the BATTM.
(c) Connect the battery cable to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.
(2)
When removing batteries:

(a) Disconnect the battery cable from the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.
(b) Remove the batteries from the PIM or the BATTM.
Recommended Battery
Internal Battery:
YUASA
MATSUSHITA
type NPH-3.2-12
type LCR-12V3.4NE
External Battery:
(BATTM)
YUASA
MATSUSHITA
type NP-24-12B
type LCL-12V-24
129
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
BATTERY CONNECTION
CAUTION
3. Battery Replacement Table and Battery Warnings
The label which shows battery replacement table and battery warnings is attached to the
reverse side of Front Cover for PIM and BATTM.
During the battery installation process, the warning statements must be observed. When
replacing batteries, the battery replacement table should be observed in order to increase battery life and insure a safe operation.
FRONT COVER
LABEL
PIM/BATTM
CAUTION
TO PREVENT INJURY AND SKIN BURN,

PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING.
o DO NOT STRIKE A MATCH OR CAUSE A SPARK IN

VICINITY OF BATTERY.
o PLACE THE EQUIPMENT WELL VENTILATED
AREA.
o DO NOT SHORT.
o REPLACE BATTERY ONLY AFTER BATTERY
GASES HAVE BEEN DISPERSED.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT TABLE

INSTALLATION DATE:
REPLACEMENT DATE:
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
(SYSTEM)
REPLACEMENT INTERVAL
3 YEARS
2 YEARS
1YEAR
ELECTROLYTE LEAKAGE, FIRE, SMOKE, OR OTHER

HAZARDS MAY RESULT IF THE BATTERY IS NOT REPLACED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFIED INTERVALS.
130
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/15/2007
BATTERY CONNECTION
Internal Battery Connection

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Connect the BATT CA INT cable to the batteries as shown below.

Mount the battery unit (24 V DC, 3.2-3.4 AH) into the PIM.
Plug the BATT CA INT connector into the BATT1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.
Secure the batteries and battery cable using tie wraps.
Internal Battery Mounting

DIMENSION OF BATTERY
67 mm
(2.6 inch)
60 mm
(2.4 inch)
PIM
134 mm
(5.3 inch)
Recommended Batteries
Yuasa NPH-3.2-12
Matsushita LCR-12V 3.4 NE
TO BATT1
CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121
/PZ-PW126
BATT CA INT
RED
+
+
BLUE/BLACK
BLACK
INTERNAL BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 3.2 TO 3.4 AH)
131
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
BATTERY CONNECTION
Internal Battery Mounting
TIE WRAP
132
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
BATTERY CONNECTION
(5)
When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the BATT CA INT and the PWR
CA-A as shown below.
Internal Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Configuration

NOTE 1: One Internal Battery unit (24 V DC, 3.2-3.4 AH) can be mounted in each PIM.
NOTE 2: Internal Batteries are multi-connected for each two PIMs.
PWR
BATT CA INT
PWR
BATT CA INT
PIM3
PIM7
PWR CA-A
PWR CA-A
PWR
BATT CA INT
PWR
BATT CA INT
PIM2
PIM6
PWR
BATT CA INT
PWR
BATT CA INT
PIM1
PIM5
PWR CA-A
PWR CA-A
PWR
BATT CA INT
PWR
BATT CA INT
PIM4
PIM0
133
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
BATTERY CONNECTION
External / BATTM Battery Connection

(1)
(2)
(3)
Connect the BATT CA EXT cable to the batteries as shown below.

Mount the battery units (24 V DC, 24 AH per unit) into the Battery Module (BATTM), if the BATTM
required.
Plug the BATT CA EXT connector into the BATT1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card in
PIM0 or PIM4.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the BATTM.
Battery Mounting into BATTM

DIMENSION OF BATTERY
175 mm
(6.9 inch)
TO BATT1 CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
IN PIM0/PIM4
125 mm
(4.9 inch)
BATT CA EXT
165 mm
(6.5 inch)
Recommended Batteries
Yuasa NP-24-12B
Matsushita LCL-12V-24
BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 24 AH)
BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 24 AH)
134
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
BATTERY CONNECTION
(4)
(5)
Hang the hooks of the BATTERY STOPPERs on the BATTM.

Slide the BATTERY STOPPERs left and secure them with four screws.
NOTE:
The BATTERY STOPPERs and screws are attached to the BATTM.
Battery Mounted into BATTM

TO BATT1 CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
IN PIM0/P
BATTERY STOPPER
BATTM
HOOK
BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 24 AH)
SCREW
135
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
BATTERY CONNECTION
(6)
When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the BATT CA EXT and the PWR
CA-A as shown below.
External/BATTM Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Configuration

NOTE 1: One pair each of battery unit (24 V DC, 24 AH) can be housed in a BATTM, for each two PIMs.
NOTE 2: External Batteries are multi-connected for each four PIMs.
PWR
PWR
PIM3
PIM7
PWR
PWR
CA-A
PWR
PWR
CA-A
PIM2
PIM6
PWR
PWR
PIM1
PIM5
PWR
PWR
PIM0
PIM4
BATT CA EXT
BATTM/
EXTERNAL BATT
BATT CA EXT
BATTM/
EXTERNAL BATT
136
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

Installation of External MDF
Secure the external MDF onto the floor or the wall.
Mount the required MDF components.
If required, install the cable ducts for the cables to be laid between the MDF and the Main Equipment.
In this case, confirm the locations of the cable holes for the Main Equipment.
MDF Cable Hole Location
MODULE
BASE
FRONT
: CABLE HOLE
137
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
MDF Cable
To facilitate the termination of the 25 pair cables (MDF cables) from the system to the MDF shown below,
the length of each cable to be used should be predetermined according to the distance between the MDF
and the system. Each cable should be labeled at both ends using a cable number or cable designation as
shown below.
MDF Cable
CHAMP CONNECTOR
TO PIM
TWISTED 25 PAIR CABLES
TO MDF
138
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
MDF Cables for each PIM

FROM
TO
CABLE
DESIGNATION
MDF
0 LTC0
MODULE
CONNECTION
CABLE
NUMBER
PIM0
LTC0
LTC1
0 LTC1
LTC2
0 LTC2
LTC3
0 LTC3
LTC0
LTC1
1 LTC1
LTC2
1 LTC2
LTC3
1 LTC3
LTC0
LTC1
10
2 LTC1
LTC2
11
2 LTC2
LTC3
12
2 LTC3
LTC0
13
LTC1
14
3 LTC1
LTC2
15
3 LTC2
LTC3
16
3 LTC3
LTC0
17
LTC1
18
4 LTC1
LTC2
19
4 LTC2
LTC3
20
4 LTC3
LTC0
21
LTC1
22
5 LTC1
LTC2
23
5 LTC2
LTC3
24
5 LTC3
PIM1
PIM2
PIM3
PIM4
PIM5
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
1 LTC0
2 LTC0
3 LTC0
4 LTC0
5 LTC0
139
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
MDF Cables for each PIM

FROM
MODULE
CONNECTION
CABLE
NUMBER
PIM6
LTC0
25
LTC1
26
6 LTC1
LTC2
27
6 LTC2
LTC3
28
6 LTC3
LTC0
29
LTC1
30
7 LTC1
LTC2
31
7 LTC2
LTC3
32
7 LTC3
PIM7
140
TO
CABLE
DESIGNATION
MDF
6 LTC0
MDF
7 LTC0
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Cable Running to External MDF

(1)
When using the cable hole of the BASE, bring the MDF cable up to the Main Equipment through the
cable hole of the BASE.
(2)
When using the cable hole of the PIM, make the cable hole on the right side of PIM. Then, bring the
MDF cable up to PIM0 through the cable hole of the BASE, and bring the MDF cable up to the other
PIM through the cable hole (right side) of each PIM.
Making Cable Hole on PIM
FRONT
CUT OFF THE PLATE.
FILE THE PROJECTIONS.
141
PUT IN THE EDGINGS.
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
(3)
Connect the champ connector of each MDF cable to the LTC connector located on the PIM using the
screws provided, as shown below.
(4)
Secure the MDF cables to the PIM using tie wraps.
Cable Running to External MDF

(a) Using cable hole of BASE
PIM3
LTC CONNECTOR
PIM2
CHAMP CONNECTOR
PIM1
PIM0
BATTM
TO MDF
FRONT
142
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Cable Running to the External MDF

(b) Using cable hole of PIM
PIM3
TO MDF
LTC CONNECTOR
PIM2
CHAMP CONNECTOR
TO MDF
PIM1
TO MDF
PIM0
TO MDF
BATTM
FRONT
143
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

Cable Connection to MDF
Connect the cables to the MDF referring to below.
Card Slots and the LTC Connectors
PFT
MP12/FP12
LT11/AP11
LT10/AP10
LT09/AP09
LT08/AP08
LT07/AP07
LT06/AP06
LT05/AP05
LT04/AP04
LT03/AP03
LT02/AP02
LT01/AP01
LT00/AP00
VM
PIM0 - 7
AC/DC
PWR
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
LTC1
LTC2
LTC3
BWB
FRONT
LTC Connector Accommodation

LTC CONNECTOR
CARD SLOT NUMBER
LTC0
LT00 - LT02/AP00 - AP02
LTC1
LT03 - LT05/AP03 - AP05
LTC2
LT06 - LT08/AP06 - AP08
LTC3
LT09 - LT11/AP09 - AP11
144
REMARKS
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
Location of Each LEN

This figure shows the relationship between each Line Equipment Number (LEN) and each Card Slot Number (LT Number).
(1)
LEN of CM14
LEN 00000 - 01127 (PIM0 - 3)
LEN 02000 - 03127 (PIM4 - 7)
(2)
Page 146
Page 147
LEN of CM10
LEN 000 - 363 (PIM0 - 3)
LEN 400 - 763 (PIM4 - 7)
Page 148
Page 149
145
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
LEN 00000 - 01127 (PIM0 - 3)
Location of each LEN (CM14)

XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
(LTXX)
LEN of CM14
(LINE EQUIPMENT NUMBER)
XX : FP NUMBER (00-31)[For Series 3200 R6.2/R7 or earlier]
FP NUMBER (00-63)[For Series 3300 or later]
YYY : PORT NUMBER (000-127)
CARD SLOT NUMBER
PIM3
01071
01070
01069
01068
01067
01066
01065
01064
(LT00)
01079
01078
01077
01076
01075
01074
01073
01072
(LT01)
01087
01086
01085
01084
01083
01082
01081
01080
(LT02)
01095
01094
01093
01092
01091
01090
01089
01088
(LT03)
01103
01102
01101
01100
01099
01098
01097
01096
(LT04)
01111
01110
01109
01108
01107
01106
01105
01104
(LT05)
01119
01118
01117
01116
01115
01114
01113
01112
(LT06)
01127
01126
01125
01124
01123
01122
01121
01120
(LT07)
PIM2
01007
01006
01005
01004
01003
01002
01001
01000
(LT00)
01015
01014
01013
01012
01011
01010
01009
01008
(LT01)
01023
01022
01021
01020
01019
01018
01017
01016
(LT02)
01031
01030
01029
01028
01027
01026
01025
01024
(LT03)
01039
01038
01037
01036
01035
01034
01033
01032
(LT04)
01047
01046
01045
01044
01043
01042
01041
01040
(LT05)
01055
01054
01053
01052
01051
01050
01049
01048
(LT06)
01063
01062
01061
01060
01059
01058
01057
01056
(LT07)
PIM1
00071
00070
00069
00068
00067
00066
00065
00064
(LT00)
00079
00078
00077
00076
00075
00074
00073
00072
(LT01)
00087
00086
00085
00084
00083
00082
00081
00080
(LT02)
00095
00094
00093
00092
00091
00090
00089
00088
(LT03)
00103
00102
00101
00100
00099
00098
00097
00096
(LT04)
00111
00110
00109
00108
00107
00106
00105
00104
(LT05)
00119
00118
00117
00116
00115
00114
00113
00112
(LT06)
00127
00126
00125
00124
00123
00122
00121
00120
(LT07)
PIM0
00007
00006
00005
00004
00003
00002
00001
00000
(LT00)
00015
00014
00013
00012
00011
00010
00009
00008
(LT01)
00023
00022
00021
00020
00019
00018
00017
00016
(LT02)
00031
00030
00029
00028
00027
00026
00025
00024
(LT03)
00039
00038
00037
00036
00035
00034
00033
00032
(LT04)
00047
00046
00045
00044
00043
00042
00041
00040
(LT05)
00055
00054
00053
00052
00051
00050
00049
00048
(LT06)
00063
00062
00061
00060
00059
00058
00057
00056
(LT07)
01103
01102
01101
01100
(LT08)
01111
01110
01109
01108
(LT09)
01119
01118
01117
01116
(LT10)
01127
01126
01125
01124
(LT11)
01055
01054
01053
01052
(LT10)
01063
01062
01061
01060
(LT11)
00119
00118
00117
00116
(LT10)
00127
00126
00125
00124
(LT11)
00055
00054
00053
00052
(LT10)
00063
00062
00061
00060
(LT11)
*
01039
01038
01037
01036
(LT08)
01047
01046
01045
01044
(LT09)
*
00103
00102
00101
00100
(LT08)
00111
00110
00109
00108
(LT09)
*
00039
00038
00037
00036
(LT08)
00047
00046
00045
00044
(LT09)
*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.
146
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
LEN 02000 - 03127 (PIM4 - 7)
PIM7
03071
03070
03069
03068
03067
03066
03065
03064
(LT00)
03079
03078
03077
03076
03075
03074
03073
03072
(LT01)
03087
03086
03085
03084
03083
03082
03081
03080
(LT02)
03095
03094
03093
03092
03091
03090
03089
03088
(LT03)
03103
03102
03101
03100
03099
03098
03097
03096
(LT04)
03111
03110
03109
03108
03107
03106
03105
03104
(LT05)
03119
03118
03117
03116
03115
03114
03113
03112
(LT06)
03127
03126
03125
03124
03123
03122
03121
03120
(LT07)
PIM6
03007
03006
03005
03004
03003
03002
03001
03000
(LT00)
03015
03014
03013
03012
03011
03010
03009
03008
(LT01)
03023
03022
03021
03020
03019
03018
03017
03016
(LT02)
03031
03030
03029
03028
03027
03026
03025
03024
(LT03)
03039
03038
03037
03036
03035
03034
03033
03032
(LT04)
03047
03046
03045
03044
03043
03042
03041
03040
(LT05)
03055
03054
03053
03052
03051
03050
03049
03048
(LT06)
03063
03062
03061
03060
03059
03058
03057
03056
(LT07)
PIM5
02071
02070
02069
02068
02067
02066
02065
02064
(LT00)
02079
02078
02077
02076
02075
02074
02073
02072
(LT01)
02087
02086
02085
02084
02083
02082
02081
02080
(LT02)
02095
02094
02093
02092
02091
02090
02089
02088
(LT03)
02103
02102
02101
02100
02099
02098
02097
02096
(LT04)
02111
02110
02109
02108
02107
02106
02105
02104
(LT05)
02119
02118
02117
02116
02115
02114
02113
02112
(LT06)
02127
02126
02125
02124
02123
02122
02121
02120
(LT07)
PIM4
02007
02006
02005
02004
02003
02002
02001
02000
(LT00)
02015
02014
02013
02012
02011
02010
02009
02008
(LT01)
02023
02022
02021
02020
02019
02018
02017
02016
(LT02)
02031
02030
02029
02028
02027
02026
02025
02024
(LT03)
02039
02038
02037
02036
02035
02034
02033
02032
(LT04)
02047
02046
02045
02044
02043
02042
02041
02040
(LT05)
02055
02054
02053
02052
02051
02050
02049
02048
(LT06)
02063
02062
02061
02060
02059
02058
02057
02056
(LT07)
03103
03102
03101
03100
(LT08)
03111
03110
03109
03108
(LT09)
03119
03118
03117
03116
(LT10)
03127
03126
03125
03124
(LT11)
03055
03054
03053
03052
(LT10)
03063
03062
03061
03060
(LT11)
02119
02118
02117
02116
(LT10)
02127
02126
02125
02124
(LT11)
02055
02054
02053
02052
(LT10)
02063
02062
02061
02060
(LT11)
*
03039
03038
03037
03036
(LT08)
03047
03046
03045
03044
(LT09)
*
02103
02102
02101
02100
(LT08)
02111
02110
02109
02108
(LT09)
*
02039
02038
02037
02036
(LT08)
02047
02046
02045
02044
(LT09)
*
147
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
LEN 000 - 363 (PIM0 - 3)

XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
(LTXX)
LEN of CM10
(LINE EQUIPMENT NUMBER)
X : PIM NUMBER (0-7)
YY : PORT NUMBER (00-63)
CARD SLOT NUMBER
PIM3
307
306
305
304
303
302
301
300
(LT00)
315
314
313
312
311
310
309
308
(LT01)
323
322
321
320
319
318
317
316
(LT02)
331
330
329
328
327
326
325
324
(LT03)
339
338
337
336
335
334
333
332
(LT04)
347
346
345
344
343
342
341
340
(LT05)
355
354
353
352
351
350
349
348
(LT06)
363
362
361
360
359
358
357
356
(LT07)
PIM2
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
(LT00)
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
(LT01)
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
(LT02)
231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
(LT03)
239
238
237
236
235
234
233
232
(LT04)
247
246
245
244
243
242
241
240
(LT05)
255
254
253
252
251
250
249
248
(LT06)
263
262
261
260
259
258
257
256
(LT07)
PIM1
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
(LT00)
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
(LT01)
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
(LT02)
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
(LT03)
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
(LT04)
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
(LT05)
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
148
(LT06)
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
(LT07)
PIM0
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
000
(LT00)
015
014
013
012
011
010
009
008
(LT01)
023
022
021
020
019
018
017
016
(LT02)
031
030
029
028
027
026
025
024
(LT03)
039
038
037
036
035
034
033
032
(LT04)
047
046
045
044
043
042
041
040
(LT05)
055
054
053
052
051
050
049
048
(LT06)
063
062
061
060
059
058
057
056
(LT07)
339
338
337
336
(LT08)
347
346
345
344
(LT09)
355
354
353
352
(LT10)
363
362
361
360
(LT11)
255
254
253
252
(LT10)
263
262
261
260
(LT11)
155
154
153
152
(LT10)
163
162
161
160
(LT11)
055
054
053
052
(LT10)
063
062
061
060
(LT11)
*
239
238
237
236
(LT08)
247
246
245
244
(LT09)
*
139
138
137
136
(LT08)
147
146
145
144
(LT09)
*
039
038
037
036
(LT08)
047
046
045
044
(LT09)
*
148
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
LEN 400 - 763 (PIM4 - 7)
PIM7
707
706
705
704
703
702
701
700
(LT00)
715
714
713
712
711
710
709
708
(LT01)
723
722
721
720
719
718
717
716
(LT02)
731
730
729
728
727
726
725
724
(LT03)
739
738
737
736
735
734
733
732
(LT04)
747
746
745
744
743
742
741
740
(LT05)
755
754
753
752
751
750
749
748
(LT06)
763
762
761
760
759
758
757
756
(LT07)
PIM6
607
606
605
604
603
602
601
600
(LT00)
615
614
613
612
611
610
609
608
(LT01)
623
622
621
620
619
618
617
616
(LT02)
631
630
629
628
627
626
625
624
(LT03)
639
638
637
636
635
634
633
632
(LT04)
647
646
645
644
643
642
641
640
(LT05)
655
654
653
652
651
650
649
648
(LT06)
663
662
661
660
659
658
657
656
(LT07)
PIM5
507
506
505
504
503
502
501
500
(LT00)
515
514
513
512
511
510
509
508
(LT01)
523
522
521
520
519
518
517
516
(LT02)
531
530
529
528
527
526
525
524
(LT03)
539
538
537
536
535
534
533
532
(LT04)
547
546
545
544
543
542
541
540
(LT05)
555
554
553
552
551
550
549
548
(LT06)
563
562
561
560
559
558
557
556
(LT07)
PIM4
407
406
405
404
403
402
401
400
(LT00)
415
414
413
412
411
410
409
408
(LT01)
423
422
421
420
419
418
417
416
(LT02)
431
430
429
428
427
426
425
424
(LT03)
439
438
437
436
435
434
433
432
(LT04)
447
446
445
444
443
442
441
440
(LT05)
455
454
453
452
451
450
449
448
(LT06)
463
462
461
460
459
458
457
456
(LT07)
739
738
737
736
(LT08)
747
746
745
744
(LT09)
755
754
753
752
(LT10)
763
762
761
760
(LT11)
655
654
653
652
(LT10)
663
662
661
660
(LT11)
555
554
553
552
(LT10)
563
562
561
560
(LT11)
455
454
453
452
(LT10)
463
462
461
460
(LT11)
*
639
638
637
636
(LT08)
647
646
645
644
(LT09)
*
539
538
537
536
(LT08)
547
546
545
544
(LT09)
*
439
438
437
436
(LT08)
447
446
445
444
(LT09)
*
149
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement

This figure shows the LTC Connector Pin Arrangement.
(1)
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)
(2)
PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)

PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)
Page 151
Page 152
Page 153
Page 154
Page 155
Page 156
Page 157
Page 158
PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)

PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)
Page 159
Page 160
Page 161
Page 162
Page 163
Page 164
Page 165
Page 166
150
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC0
1
26
2
27
3
28
4
29
5
30
6
31
7
32
8
33
9
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25 MJ 50 MN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN00000
00001
00002
00003
LT00/AP00
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
LT01/AP01
00012
00013
00014
00015
00016
00017
00018
00019
LT02/AP02
00020
00021
00022
LEN00023
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN00048
00049
00050
00051
LT06/AP06
00052
00053
00054
00055
00056
00057
00058
00059
LT07/AP07
00060
00061
00062
00063
00036
00037
LT08/AP08*
00038
LEN00039
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN00024
00025
LT03/AP03
00026
00027
00028
00029
00030
00031
00032
00033
LT04/AP04
00034
00035
00036
00037
00038
00039
00040
00041
LT05/AP05
00042
00043
00044
00045
00046
LEN00047
LEN00044
00045
LT09/AP09*
00046
00047
00052
00053
LT10/AP10*
00054
00055
00060
00061
LT11/AP11*
00062
LEN00063
151
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN00064
00065
00066
00067
LT00/AP00
00068
00069
00070
00071
00072
00073
00074
00075
LT01/AP01
00076
00077
00078
00079
00080
00081
00082
00083
LT02/AP02
00084
00085
00086
LEN00087
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN00112
00113
00114
00115
LT06/AP06
00116
00117
00118
00119
00120
00121
00122
00123
LT07/AP07
00124
00125
00126
00127
00100
00101
LT08/AP08*
00102
LEN00103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN00088
00089
LT03/AP03
00090
00091
00092
00093
00094
00095
00096
00097
LT04/AP04
00098
00099
00100
00101
00102
00103
00104
00105
LT05/AP05
00106
00107
00108
00109
00110
LEN00111
LEN00108
00109
LT09/AP09*
00110
00111
00116
00117
LT10/AP10*
00118
00119
00124
00125
LT11/AP11*
00126
LEN00127
152
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN01000
01001
01002
01003
LT00/AP00
01004
01005
01006
01007
01008
01009
01010
01011
LT01/AP01
01012
01013
01014
01015
01016
01017
01018
01019
LT02/AP02
01020
01021
01022
LEN01023
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN01048
01049
01050
01051
LT06/AP06
01052
01053
01054
01055
01056
01057
01058
01059
LT07/AP07
01060
01061
01062
01063
01036
01037
LT08/AP08*
01038
LEN01039
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN01024
01025
LT03/AP03
01026
01027
01028
01029
01030
01031
01032
01033
LT04/AP04
01034
01035
01036
01037
01038
01039
01040
01041
LT05/AP05
01042
01043
01044
01045
01046
LEN01047
LEN01044
01045
LT09/AP09*
01046
01047
01052
01053
LT10/AP10*
01054
01055
01060
01061
LT11/AP11*
01062
LEN01063
153
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN01064
01065
01066
01067
LT00/AP00
01068
01069
01070
01071
01072
01073
01074
01075
LT01/AP01
01076
01077
01078
01079
01080
01081
01082
01083
LT02/AP02
01084
01085
01086
LEN01087
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN01112
01113
01114
01115
LT06/AP06
01116
01117
01118
01119
01120
01121
01122
01123
LT07/AP07
01124
01125
01126
01127
01100
01101
LT08/AP08*
01102
LEN01103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN01088
01089
LT03/AP03
01090
01091
01092
01093
01094
01095
01096
01097
LT04/AP04
01098
01099
01100
01101
01102
01103
01104
01105
LT05/AP05
01106
01107
01108
01109
01110
LEN01111
LEN01108
01109
LT09/AP09*
01110
01111
01116
01117
LT10/AP10*
01118
01119
01124
01125
LT11/AP11*
01126
LEN01127
154
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN02000
02001
02002
02003
LT00/AP00
02004
02005
02006
02007
02008
02009
02010
02011
LT01/AP01
02012
02013
02014
02015
02016
02017
02018
02019
LT02/AP02
02020
02021
02022
LEN02023
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN02048
02049
02050
02051
LT06/AP06
02052
02053
02054
02055
02056
02057
02058
02059
LT07/AP07
02060
02061
02062
02063
02036
02037
LT08/AP08*
02038
LEN02039
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN02024
02025
LT03/AP03
02026
02027
02028
02029
02030
02031
02032
02033
LT04/AP04
02034
02035
02036
02037
02038
02039
02040
02041
LT05/AP05
02042
02043
02044
02045
02046
LEN02047
LEN02044
02045
LT09/AP09*
02046
02047
02052
02053
LT10/AP10*
02054
02055
02060
02061
LT11/AP11*
02062
LEN02063
155
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN02064
02065
02066
02067
LT00/AP00
02068
02069
02070
02071
02072
02073
02074
02075
LT01/AP01
02076
02077
02078
02079
02080
02081
02082
02083
LT02/AP02
02084
02085
02086
LEN02087
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN02112
02113
02114
02115
LT06/AP06
02116
02117
02118
02119
02120
02121
02122
02123
LT07/AP07
02124
02125
02126
02127
02100
02101
LT08/AP08*
02102
LEN02103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN02088
02089
LT03/AP03
02090
02091
02092
02093
02094
02095
02096
02097
LT04/AP04
02098
02099
02100
02101
02102
02103
02104
02105
LT05/AP05
02106
02107
02108
02109
02110
LEN02111
LEN02108
02109
LT09/AP09*
02110
02111
02116
02117
LT10/AP10*
02118
02119
02124
02125
LT11/AP11*
02126
LEN02127
156
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN03000
03001
03002
03003
LT00/AP00
03004
03005
03006
03007
03008
03009
03010
03011
LT01/AP01
03012
03013
03014
03015
03016
03017
03018
03019
LT02/AP02
03020
03021
03022
LEN03023
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN03048
03049
03050
03051
LT06/AP06
03052
03053
03054
03055
03056
03057
03058
03059
LT07/AP07
03060
03061
03062
03063
03036
03037
LT08/AP08*
03038
LEN03039
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN03024
03025
LT03/AP03
03026
03027
03028
03029
03030
03031
03032
03033
LT04/AP04
03034
03035
03036
03037
03038
03039
03040
03041
LT05/AP05
03042
03043
03044
03045
03046
LEN03047
LEN03044
03045
LT09/AP09*
03046
03047
03052
03053
LT10/AP10*
03054
03055
03060
03061
LT11/AP11*
03062
LEN03063
157
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN03064
03065
03066
03067
LT00/AP00
03068
03069
03070
03071
03072
03073
03074
03075
LT01/AP01
03076
03077
03078
03079
03080
03081
03082
03083
LT02/AP02
03084
03085
03086
LEN03087
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN03112
03113
03114
03115
LT06/AP06
03116
03117
03118
03119
03120
03121
03122
03123
LT07/AP07
03124
03125
03126
03127
03100
03101
LT08/AP08*
03102
LEN03103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN03088
03089
LT03/AP03
03090
03091
03092
03093
03094
03095
03096
03097
LT04/AP04
03098
03099
03100
03101
03102
03103
03104
03105
LT05/AP05
03106
03107
03108
03109
03110
LEN03111
LEN03108
03109
LT09/AP09*
03110
03111
03116
03117
LT10/AP10*
03118
03119
03124
03125
LT11/AP11*
03126
LEN03127
158
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC0
1
26
2
27
3
28
4
29
5
30
6
31
7
32
8
33
9
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25 MJ 50 MN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN000
001
002
003
LT00/AP00
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
LT01/AP01
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
LT02/AP02
020
021
022
LEN023
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN048
049
050
051
LT06/AP06
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
LT07/AP07
060
061
062
063
036
037
LT08/AP08*
038
LEN039
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN024
025
LT03/AP03
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
LT04/AP04
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
LT05/AP05
042
043
044
045
046
LEN047
LEN044
045
LT09/AP09*
046
047
052
053
LT10/AP10*
054
055
060
061
LT11/AP11*
062
LEN063
159
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN100
101
102
103
LT00/AP00
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
LT01/AP01
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
LT02/AP02
120
121
122
LEN123
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN148
149
150
151
LT06/AP06
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
LT07/AP07
160
161
162
163
136
137
LT08/AP08*
138
LEN139
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN124
125
LT03/AP03
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
LT04/AP04
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
LT05/AP05
142
143
144
145
146
LEN147
LEN144
145
LT09/AP09*
146
147
152
153
LT10/AP10*
154
155
160
161
LT11/AP11*
162
LEN163
160
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN200
201
202
203
LT00/AP00
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
LT01/AP01
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
LT02/AP02
220
221
222
LEN223
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN248
249
250
251
LT06/AP06
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
LT07/AP07
260
261
262
263
236
237
LT08/AP08*
238
LEN239
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN224
225
LT03/AP03
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
LT04/AP04
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
LT05/AP05
242
243
244
245
246
LEN247
LEN244
245
LT09/AP09*
246
247
252
253
LT10/AP10*
254
255
260
261
LT11/AP11*
262
LEN263
161
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN300
301
302
303
LT00/AP00
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
LT01/AP01
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
LT02/AP02
320
321
322
LEN323
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN348
349
350
351
LT06/AP06
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
LT07/AP07
360
361
362
363
336
337
LT08/AP08*
338
LEN339
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN324
325
LT03/AP03
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
LT04/AP04
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
LT05/AP05
342
343
344
345
346
LEN347
LEN344
345
LT09/AP09*
346
347
352
353
LT10/AP10*
354
355
360
361
LT11/AP11*
362
LEN363
162
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN400
401
402
403
LT00/AP00
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
LT01/AP01
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
LT02/AP02
420
421
422
LEN423
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN448
449
450
451
LT06/AP06
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
LT07/AP07
460
461
462
463
436
437
LT08/AP08*
438
LEN439
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN424
425
LT03/AP03
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
LT04/AP04
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
LT05/AP05
442
443
444
445
446
LEN447
LEN444
445
LT09/AP09*
446
447
452
453
LT10/AP10*
454
455
460
461
LT11/AP11*
462
LEN463
163
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN500
501
502
503
LT00/AP00
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
LT01/AP01
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
LT02/AP02
520
521
522
LEN523
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN548
549
550
551
LT06/AP06
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
LT07/AP07
560
561
562
563
536
537
LT08/AP08*
538
LEN539
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN524
525
LT03/AP03
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
LT04/AP04
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
LT05/AP05
542
543
544
545
546
LEN547
LEN544
545
LT09/AP09*
546
547
552
553
LT10/AP10*
554
555
560
561
LT11/AP11*
562
LEN563
164
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN600
601
602
603
LT00/AP00
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
LT01/AP01
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
LT02/AP02
620
621
622
LEN623
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN648
649
650
651
LT06/AP06
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
LT07/AP07
660
661
662
663
636
637
LT08/AP08*
638
LEN639
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN624
625
LT03/AP03
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
LT04/AP04
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
LT05/AP05
642
643
644
645
646
LEN647
LEN644
645
LT09/AP09*
646
647
652
653
LT10/AP10*
654
655
660
661
LT11/AP11*
662
LEN663
165
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN700
701
702
703
LT00/AP00
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
LT01/AP01
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
LT02/AP02
720
721
722
LEN723
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN748
749
750
751
LT06/AP06
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
LT07/AP07
760
761
762
763
736
737
LT08/AP08*
738
LEN739
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN724
725
LT03/AP03
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
LT04/AP04
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
LT05/AP05
742
743
744
745
746
LEN747
LEN744
745
LT09/AP09*
746
747
752
753
LT10/AP10*
754
755
760
761
LT11/AP11*
762
LEN763
166
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
MDF Cross Connections

This table shows the cross connections on the MDF for LTC0 - LTC3.
LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection

NOTE 1: PIN No.46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC3 cannot be used.
NOTE 2: PIN No.46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC2 and LTC3 cannot be used.
NOTE 3: For the Digital Trunk Interface card, use the different LTC connector from the analog line/trunk
card. The digital line should be separated from the analog line.
TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN
RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE
CO
LDT
2-W
E&M
4-W
E&M
DID
SLT
8COT 4COT 4LDT 2LDT 2ODT 4ODT 2ODT 4ODT 4DIT 2DIT 8LC 4LC LLC
26
WH-BL
GN
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0 TxT0 TxT0 T0
BL-WH
RD
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0 TxR0 TxR0 R0 R0 R0 R0 R0
27
WH-OR
BK
T1
T1
T1
T1
RcvT0 RcvT0 T1
OR-WH
YL
R1
R1
R1
R1
RcvR0 RcvR0 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1
28
WH-GN
GN
T2
T2
T2
T2
T1 TxT1 TxT1 T2
T2
GN-WH
RD
R2
R2
R2
R2
R1 TxR1 TxR1 R2
R2 R2 R2
29
WH-BR
BK
T3
T3
T3
RcvT1 RcvT1 T3
T3
BR-WH
YL
R3
R3
R3
RcvR1 RcvR1 R3
R3 R3 R3
30
WH-SL
GN
SL-WH
31
T0
T1
T0
T1
T4
T2
TxT2
T4
RD
R4
R2
TxR2
R4
RD-BL
BK
T5
RcvT2
T5
BL-RD
YL
R5
RcvR2
R5
32
RD-OR
GN
OR-RD
33
8
NOTE 1
T6
T3
TxT3
T6
RD
R6
R3
TxR3
R6
RD-GN
BK
T7
RcvT3
T7
GN-RD
YL
R7
RcvR3
R7
T0
T1
T2
T3
T0
T1
T2
T3
167
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information

TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN
RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE
CO
LDT
2-W
E&M
4-W
E&M
DID
SLT
34
RD-BR
GN
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0 TxT0 TxT0 T0
BR-RD
RD
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
35
RD-SL
BK
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
RcvT0 RcvT0 T1
10
SL-RD
YL
R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
36
BK-BL
GN
T2
T2
T2
T1 TxT1 TxT1 T2
T2
11
BL-BK
RD
R2
R2
R2
R1 TxR1 TxR1 R2
R2 R2 R2
37
BK-OR
BK
T3
T3
T3
RcvT1 RcvT1 T3
T3
12
OR-BK
YL
R3
R3
R3
RcvR1 RcvR1 R3
R3 R3 R3
38
BK-GN
GN
13
GN-BK
39
T0
T1
T0
T1
T4
T2
TxT2
T4
RD
R4
R2
TxR2
R4
BK-BR
BK
T5
RcvT2
T5
14
BR-BK
YL
R5
RcvR2
R5
40
BK-SL
GN
15
SL-BK
41
16
NOTE 1
T6
T3
TxT3
T6
RD
R6
R3
TxR3
R6
YL-BL
BK
T7
RcvT3
T7
BL-YL
YL
R7
RcvR3
R7
T0
T1
T2
T3
T0
T1
T2
T3
168
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN
RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE
CO
LDT
2-W
E&M
4-W
E&M
DID
SLT
42
YL-OR
GN
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0 TxT0 TxT0 T0
17
OR-YL
RD
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
43
YL-GN
BK
T1
T1
T1
T1
RcvT0 RcvT0 T1
18
GN-YL
YL
R1
R1
R1
R1
44
YL-BR
GN
T2
T2
T2
T2
T1 TxT1 TxT1 T2
T2
19
BR-YL
RD
R2
R2
R2
R2
R1 TxR1 TxR1 R2
R2 R2 R2
45
YL-SL
BK
T3
T3
T3
RcvT1 RcvT1 T3
T3
20
SL-YL
YL
R3
R3
R3
RcvR1 RcvR1 R3
R3 R3 R3
46
VI-BL
GN
21
BL-VI
47
T0
T1
T0
T1
T4
T2
TxT2
T4
RD
R4
R2
TxR2
R4
VI-OR
BK
T5
RcvT2
T5
22
OR-VI
YL
R5
RcvR2
R5
48
VI-GN
GN
23
GN-VI
49
NOTE 2
T6
T3
TxT3
T6
RD
R6
R3
TxR3
R6
VI-BR
BK
T7
RcvT3
T7
24
BR-VI
YL
R7
RcvR3
R7
50
VI-SL
MN*
25
SL-VI
MJ*
T0
T1
T2
T3
T0
T1
T2
T3
PIN No.50, 25 in PIM0 are connected to external indication equipment for major card minor alarm.
169
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

TYPE OF INTERFACE
RUNNING STATION
PIN
CABLE CABLE
2wire Dterm/
SMARTCON/
DSSCON/
DESKCON
SLOTS
EXT.
EXT.
KEY/ PAGE/
EXT.
MOH/
RELAY BGM
Digital
TRK
NOTE 3
8DLC
4DLC
2DLC
DK00
4COT
DTI
26
WH-BL
GN
T0
T0
T0
K1
RA
BL-WH
RD
R0
R0
R0
K0
RB
27
WH-OR
BK
T1
T1
T1
K3
TA
OR-WH
YL
R1
R1
R1
K2
TB
28
WH-GN
GN
T2
T2
K5
GN-WH
RD
R2
R2
K4
29
WH-BR
BK
T3
T3
K7
BR-WH
YL
R3
R3
K6
30
WH-SL
GN
SL-WH
RD
R4
31
RD-BL
BK
T5
BL-RD
YL
32
RD-OR
GN
OR-RD
RD
R6
33
RD-GN
BK
T7
GN-RD
YL
R7
NOTE 1
T4
R5
T6
170
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

TYPE OF INTERFACE
RUNNING STATION
PIN
CABLE CABLE
2wire Dterm/
SMARTCON/
DSSCON/
DESKCON
SLOTS
EXT.
EXT.
Digital
KEY/ PAGE/
TRK
EXT.
MOH/
NOTE 3
RELAY BGM
8DLC
4DLC
2DLC
DK00
4COT
DTI
34
RD-BR
GN
T0
T0
T0
K1
RA
BR-RD
RD
R0
R0
R0
K0
RB
35
RD-SL
BK
T1
T1
T1
K3
TA
10
SL-RD
YL
R1
R1
R1
K2
TB
36
BK-BL
GN
T2
T2
K5
11
BL-BK
RD
R2
R2
K4
37
BK-OR
BK
T3
T3
K7
12
OR-BK
YL
R3
R3
K6
38
BK-GN
GN
13
GN-BK
RD
R4
39
BK-BR
BK
T5
14
BR-BK
YL
40
BK-SL
GN
15
SL-BK
RD
R6
41
YL-BL
BK
T7
16
BL-YL
YL
R7
T4
NOTE 1
R5
T6
171
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

TYPE OF INTERFACE
RUNNING STATION
PIN
CABLE CABLE
2wire Dterm/
SMARTCON/
DSSCON/
DESKCON
SLOTS
EXT.
EXT.
Digital
KEY/ PAGE/
TRK
EXT.
MOH/
NOTE 3
RELAY BGM
8DLC
4DLC
2DLC
DK00
4COT
DTI
42
YL-OR
GN
T0
T0
T0
K1
RA
17
OR-YL
RD
R0
R0
R0
K0
RB
43
YL-GN
BK
T1
T1
T1
K3
TA
18
GN-YL
YL
R1
R1
R1
K2
TB
44
YL-BR
GN
T2
T2
K5
19
BR-YL
RD
R2
R2
K4
45
YL-SL
BK
T3
T3
K7
20
SL-YL
YL
R3
R3
K6
46
VI-BL
GN
21
BL-VI
RD
R4
47
VI-OR
BK
T5
22
OR-VI
YL
48
VI-GN
GN
23
GN-VI
RD
R6
49
VI-BR
BK
T7
24
BR-VI
YL
R7
50
VI-SL
MN*
25
SL-VI
MJ*
T4
NOTE 2
R5
T6
PIN No.50, 25 in PIM0 are connected to external indication equipment for major card minor alarm.
172
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Peripheral Equipment and Card List
Analog C.O. Trunk
Tie Line Trunk
DID Trunk
Digital Trunk Interface
Optical Fiber Interface
POTS Splitter
In-Skin HUB
Single Line Telephone
Dterm/DSS Console
SN716 DESKCON
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON
Day/Night Mode Change by
External Key
External TAS Indicator
Paging Equipment
External Tone Source/
Announcement Machine
External BGM Source
CIRCUIT CARD
PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT
PN-2LDT/PN-4LDT
PN-2ODT/PN-4ODT
PN-2DIT/PN-4DIT
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB
PZ-M542/PZ-M557
PN-M10
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB
PN-M13
PN-4LLCB/PN-8LCAA
PN-8ETIA/PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
PZ-M675
PN-4LC/PN-8LC
PN-4LLC
PN-2DLC
PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC
PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC
PN-2DLC/PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC
PN-DK00/PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
PN-DK00
/PN-CP24-D
PN-TNTA
/PN-CP24-D
PN-TNTA
REFERENCE
Page
Page 175
Page 176
Page 185
Page 186
Page 193
Page 197
Page 201
Page 203
Page 205
Page 207
Page 237
Page 245
Page 246
Page 249
Page 252
Page 257
173
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
Peripheral Equipment and Card List

Alarm Display Panel
Built-in SMDR/MCI
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/
Hotel Printer
CIRCUIT CARD
PN-8PFTB
PN-8LC
PN-8COT
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D
174
REFERENCE
Page
Page 259
Page 264
Page 265
Page 269
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
Analog C.O. Trunk (COT)
Analog C.O. Trunk (COT)

MDF Cross Connection for C.O. Trunk Card
PIM0
LTC0
PN-8COT
LEN000
(No. 0)
LEN001
(No. 1)
LT00
LEN006
(No. 6)
LEN007
(No. 7)
R0
T0
26
26
R1
T1
27
27
R6
T6
32
32
R7
T7
33
33
MDF
TO C.O. LINE
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN006
LEN007
LTC0 (P)
1
2
R0
R1
26
27
T0
T1
26
27
T0
T1
1
2
R0
R1
7
8
R6
R7
32
33
T6
T7
32
33
T6
T7
7
8
R6
R7
175
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

LD Trunk (PN-2LDT/PN-4LDT)
MDF Cross Connection for LD Trunk Card

NOTE:
For PN-4LDT card, mount the PZ-PW122 card into the PIM which accommodates the 4LDT
card.
PIM0
LTC0
PN-4LDT
LEN000
(No. 0)
LEN001
(No. 1)
LEN002
(No. 2)
LEN003
(No. 3)
LT00
R0
T0
26
26
R1
T1
27
27
R2
T2
28
28
R3
T3
29
29
MDF
TO TIE LINE
TO TIE LINE
TO TIE LINE
TO TIE LINE
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN002
LEN003
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
R2
R3
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
T2
T3
26
27
28
29
176
T0
T1
T2
T3
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
R2
R3
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
4W E&M Trunk (PN-2ODT)

When connecting the E and M, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the
PN-2ODT card.
NOTE:
Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one PN-2ODT
card.
MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card

PIM0
INSTALLATION CABLE
PN-2ODT
CN1
2
08
MDF
07
06
J
05
04 M1
03 E1
LEN001
(No. 1)
LEN000
(No. 0)
(M)
02 M0
01 E0
(E)
LTC0
LT00
LEN000
LEN001
(No. 0)
(No. 1)
TxR0
(Tx Ring)
TxT0
26
26
(Tx Tip)
RcvR0
(Rcv Ring)
RcvT0
27
27
(Rcv Tip)
TxR1
TxT1
28
28
RcvR1
RcvT1
29
29
TO TIE LINE
177
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

1 LTC CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
1 TxR0 26 TxT0
2 RcvR0 27 RcvT0
3 TxR1 28 TxT1
4 RcvR1 29 RcvT1
2 CN1 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
LTC0 (P)
26 TxT0
27 RcvT0
28 TxT1
29 RcvT1
CN1
1 TxR0
2 RcvR0
3 TxR1
4 RcvR1
LEN001
LEN000
178
M1
E1
M0
E0
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

When connecting the E and M, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the
PN-2ODT card.
NOTE:
Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one PN-2ODT
card.

PIM0
INSTALLATION CABLE
PN-2ODT
CN1
2
08
MDF
07
06
J
05
04
M1
03
E1
02
M0
01
E0
LEN001
(No. 1)
LEN000
(No. 0)
(M)
(E)
LTC0
LT00
LEN000
LEN001
(No. 0)
(No. 1)
R0
(Ring)
T0
26
26
(Tip)
R2
T2
28
28
TO TIE LINE
179
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

2 CN1 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
1 LTC CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
1
2
3
4
R0
R2
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T2
26
27
28
29
T0
T2
1
2
3
4
CN1
R0
R2
LEN001
LEN000
180
M1
E1
M0
E0
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT00 to LT07 slots, connect speech line circuits 0 to 3 to the BWB connector. In addition, connect circuits 0 to 3 for E and M to the CN2 and CN3 connectors on the front side of the card.
NOTE 1: When connecting the speech line circuits or E and M, make the installation cable by using the
connector attached with the PN-4ODTA card.
NOTE 2: When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT08 to LT11 slots, connect speech line circuits
0 and 1 to the BWB connector. In addition, connect speech line circuit 2 and 3 to the CN1 connector on the front side of the card.

PIM0
INSTALLATION CABLE
PN-4ODT
CN3
08 M7
07
06 E7
05
04 M6
03
02 E6
01
CN2
08 M5
07
06 E5
05
LT00
04 M4
03
02 E4
01
CN1
08 M3
07 E3
06 M2
05 E2
04 M1
03 E1
02 M0
01 E0
MDF
LEN003
(No.3)
(M1)
(E1)
LEN002
(No.2)
(M0)
(E0)
LEN001
(No.1)
LEN000
(No.0)
LEN000
(No.0)
LEN001
(No.1)
LEN003
(No.3)
LEN002
(No.2)
LEN002
(No.2)
LEN003
(No.3)
TxR0
TxT0
J
1
26
LTC0
P
1
26
(TxRing)
(TxTip)
RcvR0
RcvT0
2
27
2
27
(Rcv Ring)
(Rcv Tip)
TxR1
TxT1
3
28
3
28
(TxRing)
(TxTip)
RcvR1
RcvT1
4
29
4
29
(Rcv Ring)
(Rcv Tip)
TxR2
TxT2
5
30
5
30
RcvR2
RcvT2
6
31
6
31
TxR3
TxT3
7
32
7
32
RcvR3
RcvT3
8
33
8
33
TO TIE LINE
181
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

1 LTC CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
1 TxR0 26 TxT0
2 RcvR0 27 RcvT0
3 TxR1 28 TxT1
4 RcvR1 29 RcvT1
2 CN2 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
LTC0 (P)
26 TxT0
27 RcvT0
28 TxT1
29 RcvT1
1 TxR0
2 RcvR0
3 TxR1
4 RcvR1
CN2
M1
LEN001
E1
M0
LEN000
182
E0
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT00 to LT07 slots, connect speech line circuits 0 to 3 to the BWB connector. In addition, connect circuits 0 to 3 for E and M to the CN2 and CN3 connectors on the front side of the card.
NOTE 1: When connecting the speech line circuits or E and M, make the installation cable by using the
connector attached with the PN-4ODTA card.
NOTE 2: When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT08 to LT11 slots, connect speech line circuits
0 and 1 to the BWB connector. In addition, connect speech line circuit 2 and 3 to the CN1 connector on the front side of the card.

INSTALLATION CABLE
PIM0
PN-4ODT
CN3
08 M7
07
06 E7
05
04 M6
03
02 E6
01
CN2
08 M5
07
06 E5
05
LT00
04 M4
03
02 E4
01
CN1
08 M3
07 E3
06 M2
05 E2
04 M1
03 E1
02 M0
01 E0
MDF
LEN003
(No.3)
(M1)
(E1)
LEN002
(No.2)
(M0)
(E0)
LEN001
(No.1)
LEN000
(No.0)
R0
T0
J
1
26
LTC0
P
1
26
(Ring)
(Tip)
TO TIE LINE
LEN000
(No.0)
LEN001
(No.1)
LEN003
(No.3)
LEN002
(No.2)
LEN002
(No.2)
LEN003
(No.3)
R1
T1
3
28
3
28
R2
T2
5
30
5
30
R3
T3
7
32
7
32
183
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

2 CN2 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
1 LTC CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
1
2
3
4
R0
R2
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T2
26
27
28
29
T0
T2
1
2
3
4
CN2
R0
M1
R2
LEN001
E1
M0
LEN000
184
E0
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
DID Trunk (DIT)
DID Trunk (DIT)

DID Trunk (PN-4DIT/PN-2DIT)
MDF Cross Connection for DID Trunk Card

PIM0
LTC0
J
R0
T0
26
26
R1
T1
27
27
R2
T2
28
28
R3
T3
29
29
PN-4DIT
LEN000
(No. 0)
LEN001
(No. 1)
LEN002
(No. 2)
LEN003
(No. 3)
LT00
MDF
TO DID LINE
TO DID LINE
TO DID LINE
TO DID LINE
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN002
LEN003
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
R2
R3
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
T2
T3
185
26
27
28
29
T0
T1
T2
T3
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
R2
R3
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

DTI for using a twisted pair cable (PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB)
When using a twisted-pair cable, connect the cable to a CSU via the MDF as shown below.
DTI Cable Connection via MDF

BWB
PBX
MDF
DTI
CSU
TWISTED-PAIR
CABLE
(SHIELD TYPE)
LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3 CONNECTOR
MAXIMUM 200 m (655 ft.) ...... 24DTI

MAXIMUM 400 m (1310 ft.) .... 30DTI
DTI:PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB
186
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
MDF Cross Connection for DTI Card

PIM0
LTC1
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB
MDF
RECEIVE
AP05
RA
17
17
RA
RB
42
42
RB
TA
18
18
TA
TB
43
43
TB
TO CSU
TRANSFER
LTC1 (J)
LTC1 (P)
17
RA
42
RB
42
RB
17
RA
18
TA
43
TB
43
TB
18
TA
19
44
44
19
20
45
45
20
187
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
DTI for using a coaxial cable (PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M542/PZ-M557)

When using an coaxial cable, connect the cable to a CSU via the CONN (PZ-M542/PZ-M557) card
as shown below.
DTI Cable Connection via CONN Card

BWB
PBX
PN30DTC/
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB
CSU
COAXIAL CABLE
CONN (PZ-M542/PZ-M557)
LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3 CONNECTOR
MAXIMUM 6 dB loss at 1024 kHz
188
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
Coaxial Cable Connection for DTI Card

PIM0
PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB
LTC1 PZ-M542/PZ-M557
P
RECEIVE
AP05
RA
17
17
RB
42
42
TA
18
18
TB
43
43
RCV
TO CSU
TRS
SEND
1 LTC1 CONNECTOR
2 COAXIAL CONNECTOR
LTC1 (J)
LTC1 (P)
17
RA
42
RB
42
RB
17
RA
18
TA
43
TB
43
TB
18
TA
19
44
44
19
20
45
45
20
189
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
Mounting of CONN Card (PZ-M542/PZ-M557)

STEP1: When using LTC0 or LTC2 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, take off the
PLATE from the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card. Then, overturn the PLATE and secure it to the card
with screws.
When using LTC1 or LTC3 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, skip STEP1.
NOTE: The PLATE and screws are attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card.
Connection of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 and PLATE

PLATE
PZ-M542/PZ-M557
SCREW
190
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
STEP2: Connect the LT connector on the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the LTC connector on BWB in
PIM.
NOTE: Two PZ-M542/PZ-M557 cards cannot be mounted on the adjoining LTC connectors. LTC0 and
LTC2, or LTC0 and LTC3, or LTC1 and LTC3 are mountable.
Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card
PIM
LTC CONNECTOR
LTC
LTC
LTC
0
LTC
When connecting to LTC1 or LTC3
When connecting to LTC0 or LTC2

LTC CONNECTOR
LT CONNECTOR
PZ-M542/PZ-M557
191
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
STEP3: Secure the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER with one screw.
NOTE 1: Screw is attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card.
NOTE 2: Before securing the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER, all the cards should
be mounted on the card slots and the PIM CARD STOPPER should be secured with screws. See
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS.
Page 275
Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card
PZ-M542/PZ-M557
CARD STOPPER
SCREW
192
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
Optical Fiber Interface (M10)

(1)
Connection Outline
The optical fiber interface card (PN-M10) is available for DTI to DTI connection between the NEAX
2000 IPS/Retrofit system.
When you use an optical fiber to connect between the 24-channel T1 or 30-channel E1 Digital Trunk
Interface (DTI) card, connect the fiber each other to the CN1 connector of the M10 cards in both
sites. Two 24DTI cards or two 30DTI cards are connected to one M10 card, via MDF through LTC
connector on the BWB.
Outline of Optical Fiber Connection
PN-24DTA/
PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB
OFFICE A
OFFICE B
MDF
MDF
OPTICAL
FIBER
M10
SEND
PN-24DTA/
PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB
CN1
M10
PN-24DTA/
PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB
SEND
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
CN1
PN-24DTA/
PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB
MAXIMUM 10 km
(6.25 miles)
NOTE 1: The PN-M10 card must be directly connected to the PN-M10 card in opposite office.
NOTE 2: Connect two optical fibers which are used for receive and send signals to CN1 connector of the
M10 card. The upside of CN1 connector is used for sending and the downside is used for receiving.
193
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
(2)
Fiber Requirement
Size of fiber
: Any size of Single Mode fiber
Kind of fiber optic connector : SC connector
Maximum distance
: 10 km (6.25 mile)
(3)
System Capacity for DTI to DTI connection

M10 card : Maximum 4 (One M10 card per two 24DTI or two 30DTC)
24DTI card : Maximum 8
30DTI card : Maximum 8
194
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
(4)
MDF Cross Connection
MDF Cross Connection for Optical Fiber Interface

PIM0
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB
LTC3
P
MDF
RECEIVE
AP09
RA
RA
RB
26
26
RB
TA
TA
TB
27
27
TB
1
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB
SEND
LTC3
J
RECEIVE
AP10
RA
RA
RB
34
34
RB
TA
10
10
TA
TB
35
35
TB
2
SEND
LTC1
PN-M10
No. 1
RECEIVE
RA
19
19
RA
RB
44
44
RB
TA
20
20
TA
TB
45
45
TB
SEND
LT05
RA
CN1
No. 0
17
17
RECEIVE
RA
RB
42
42
RB
TA
18
18
TA
TB
43
43
TB
3
SEND
RECEIVE
SEND
To upside of CN1 connector of PN-M10 card in opposite office

To downside of CN1 connector of PN-M10 card in opposite office
195
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
MDF Cross Connection for Optical Fiber Interface

1 LTC3 CONNECTOR
RA
26
RB
26
RB
RA
TA
27
TB
27
TB
TA
28
28
29
29
LTC (J)
(P)
2 LTC3 CONNECTOR
RA
34
RB
34
RB
RA
10
TA
35
TB
35
TB
10
TA
11
36
36
11
12
37
37
12
LTC (J)
(P)
3 LTC1 CONNECTOR
17
RA
42
RB
42
RB
17
RA
18
TA
43
TB
43
TB
18
TA
19
RA
44
RB
44
RB
19
RA
20
TA
45
TB
45
TB
20
TA
LTC (J)
(P)
196
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
POTS Splitter (M13)
POTS Splitter (M13)

(1)
Connection Outline
The POTS Splitter*1 card (PN-M13) is used to accommodate HomePNA*2/VDSL*3 modem. PN-M13
has 24-line built-in POTS Splitters and accommodates a maximum of 24-line HomePNA/VDSL
modems per card.
*1 POTS Splitter:
Plain Old Telephone Service Splitter. A device that rejects the Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) signal and allows the POTS frequencies to pass through.
*2 HomePNA:
Home Phoneline Networking Alliance. An association of companies working toward the adoption
of a single, unified phone line networking standard and bringing to market a range of interoperable
home networking solutions using in-place phone wiring.
*3 VDSL:
Very-high-data-rate Digital Subscriber Line. A technology, which accomplishes very high-speed
communications using Twisted Pair cable.
The following illustration shows the outline of POTS splitter connection.
Outline of POTS Splitter Connection

PBX
MDF
PN-4LLCB/
PN-8LCAA
HomePNA/
VDSL
Adapter
PC
NOTE
PNM13
POTS
Splitter
TEL
SPL CABLE-A
HomePNA/
VDSL
Modem
Internet
NOTE:
Router
HUB
Length of connection cable depends on the specifications of HomePNA/VDSL Adapter/Modem.
197
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
POTS Splitter (M13)
(2)
MDF Cross Connection for POTS Splitter

NOTE:
Mount the PN-M13 card in LT00-LT11 slot.

PIM0
LTC0
J
R0
T0
26
26
R1
T1
27
27
R2
T2
28
28
PN-4LLC
LEN000 (No. 0)
LEN001 (No. 1)
MDF
LT00
LEN002 (No. 2)
LEN003 (No. 3)
R3
T3
29
29
INSTALLATION CABLE
SPL CABLE-A
PN-M13
LC
HomePNA/
VDSL
Adapter
A
PC
B
POTS Splitter
POTS Splitter
TEL
A
TO SINGLE
LINE TELEPHONE
2
HomePNA/
VDSL
Modem
HUB
Router
TO
INTERNET
SPL CABLE-A
198
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
POTS Splitter (M13)
MDF Cross Connection for POTS Splitter

CIRCUIT
NO.
CHAMP CONNECTOR
FOR LINE CIRCUIT
CHAMP CONNECTOR FOR

TELEPHONE/xDSL
TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT
2
26
TI00
01
RI00
01
TO00
26
RO00
27
TI01
02
RI01
02
TO01
27
RO01
28
TI02
03
RI02
03
TO02
28
RO02
29
TI03
04
RI03
04
TO03
29
RO03
30
TI04
05
RI04
05
TO04
30
RO04
31
TI05
06
RI05
06
TO05
31
RO05
32
TI06
07
RI06
07
TO06
32
RO06
33
TI07
08
RI07
08
TO07
33
RO07
34
TI08
09
RI08
09
TO08
34
RO08
35
TI09
10
RI09
10
TO09
35
RO09
10
36
TI10
11
RI10
11
TO10
36
RO10
11
37
TI11
12
RI11
12
TO11
37
RO11
12
38
TI12
13
RI12
13
TO12
38
RO12
13
39
TI13
14
RI13
14
TO13
39
RO13
14
40
TI14
15
RI14
15
TO14
40
RO14
15
41
TI15
16
RI15
16
TO15
41
RO15
16
42
TI16
17
RI16
17
TO16
42
RO16
17
43
TI17
18
RI17
18
TO17
43
RO17
18
44
TI18
19
RI18
19
TO18
44
RO18
19
45
TI19
20
RI19
20
TO19
45
RO19
20
46
TI20
21
RI20
21
TO20
46
RO20
21
47
TI21
22
RI21
22
TO21
47
RO21
22
48
TI22
23
RI22
23
TO22
48
RO22
23
49
TI23
24
RI23
24
TO23
49
RO23
199
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
POTS Splitter (M13)
SPL CABLE-A
Connector A (24-pin)
Champ Connector (48-pin)
To LC/TEL
Connector A
of M13 Card
Connector B (24-pin)
To Champ
Connector
To LC/TEL
Connector B
of M13 Card
0.55 m (1.8 ft)
200
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
In-Skin HUB
In-Skin HUB
(1)
Connection Outline
The In-Skin HUB card (PN-8ETIA) is used to accommodate switching HUB. PN-8ETIA card has 8ports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Auto-negotiation fixed).
PZ-M675 card is mounted on PN-8ETIA card. PZ-M675 card is used to accommodate all 10BASET/100BASE-TX ports on a PN-8ETIA card with Power over Ethernet (PoE).
Outline of Switching HUB Connection

PN-8ETIA card
PZ-M675 card
BWB
RJ45 Connector
LAN 7/8
LAN 5/6
LAN 3/4
LAN 1/2
PBX
MP
card
To IP TERMINAL
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Cable
MAXIMUM 100 m (327.5 ft.)
The number of IP terminal that can be connected to the In-Skin HUB is as follows.
Number of IP Terminal
IP Terminal
Inaset
DtermIP
ITR-LC-1
ITR-240G-1
ITR-320C-1
ITR-8D-2
ITR-8D-3
ITR-16D-2
ITR-16D-3
ITR-16LD-3
ITR-32D-3
ITR-4D-1
No. of IP Terminal (MAXIMUM)

2000 IPS
IPSDM
5
7
5
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
REMARKS
2
5
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
201
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
In-Skin HUB
(2)
LAN Interface
PN-8ETIA card has 8-ports RJ45 type connector. Each connector has LINK/ACT LED and 10/
100(SPD) LED.
LAN Interface connectors

LINK/ACT
10/100
87654321
12345678
10/100
LINK/ACT
RJ-45 Connector Pin Assignment

1
Data (MDI-X)
RD+
RD-
TD+
TD-
Signal pair PoE
DC Pos
DC Pos
DC Neg.
DC Neg.
NOTE 1: Cable connection should use the category 5 and UL standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable.
NOTE 2: Since other Switching HUB or MP card occupies 1Port of PN-8ETIA card, a terminal connectable to PN-8ETIA card is maximum 7.
202
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
Single Line Telephone (LC/LLC)

Standard Line (PN-8LC/PN-4LC)
MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Standard Line)

PIM0
LTC0
J
PN-8LC
MDF
ROSETTE
LEN000
(No. 0)
LEN001
(No. 1)
LT00
LEN006
(No. 6)
LEN007
(No. 7)
R0
T0
26
26
R1
T1
27
27
R6
T6
32
32
R7
T7
33
33
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN006
LEN007
1
2
7
8
R0
R1
R6
R7
26
27
32
33
TO SINGLE
LINE TELEPHONE
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
T6
T7
26
27
32
33
203
T0
T1
T6
T7
1
2
7
8
R0
R1
R6
R7
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
Long Line (PN-4LLC)
MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Long Line)

NOTE:
For PN-4LLC card, mount the PZ-PW122 card into the PIM which accommodates the 4LLC
card.
PIM0
LTC0
PN-4LLC
LEN000 (No. 0)
LEN001 (No. 1)
LT00
LEN002 (No. 2)
LEN003 (No. 3)
R0
T0
26
26
R1
T1
27
27
R2
T2
28
28
R3
T3
29
29
MDF
TO SINGLE LINE
TELEPHONE
(FOR LONG LINE)
TO SINGLE LINE
TELEPHONE
(FOR LONG LINE)
TO SINGLE LINE
TELEPHONE
(FOR LONG LINE)
TO SINGLE LINE
TELEPHONE
(FOR LONG LINE)
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN002
LEN003
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
R2
R3
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
T2
T3
26
27
28
29
204
T0
T1
T2
T3
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
R2
R3
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)

Standard Line (PN-8DLC/PN-4DLC)
MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Standard Line)

PIM0
LTC0
J
R0
T0
26
26
R1
T1
27
27
R6
T6
32
32
R7
T7
33
33
PN-8DLC
LEN000
(No. 0)
MDF
ROSETTE
TO Dterm /
DSS CONSOLE
Exi
LL
LT00
LEN006
(No. 6)
LEN007
(No. 7)
OP
OP
ER
ER
Tra
nsf
er
Fea
ture
66
MN
MN
OO
Re
99
Co
Re
dia
...
...
...
...
cal
WX
WX
YZ
YZ
##
An
sw
er
Hel
...
...
...
...
DE
DEF
F
88
TU
TU
VV
00
Ho
ld
...
...
...
...
AB
ABC
C
55
JK
JK
77
(No. 1)
N
E
C
...
...
...
...
44
GH
GH
II
PQ
PQ
RS
RS
LEN001
...
...
...
...
11
nf
Sp
ea
ker
MIC
MODULAR CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LTC0 (P)
LEN000
LEN001
1
2
R0
R1
26
27
T0
T1
26
27
T0
T1
1
2
R0
R1
LEN006
LEN007
7
8
R6
R7
32
33
T6
T7
32
33
T6
T7
7
8
R6
R7
205
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
Long Line (PN-4DLCT/PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN)
MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Long Line)

PIM0
LTC0
PN-4DLCT/2DLCB/
PN-2DLCN
R0
MDF
ROSETTE
TO Dterm /
DSS CONSOLE
Exi
...
26
26
44
GH
GH
II
RS
RS
Tra
LT00
LEN002 (No. 2)
LEN003 (No. 3)
T1
27
27
R2
T2
28
28
R3
T3
29
29
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
R2
R3
29
28
27
26
Co
Re
An
sw
er
Sp
ea
dia
...
Hel
...
...
...
...
...
...
Fea
ture
...
Re
cal
l
nf
ker
MIC
MODULAR CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN002
LEN003
66
MN
MN
OO
99
WX
WX
YZ
YZ
##
nsf
er
R1
DE
DEF
F
88
TU
TU
VV
00
OP
OP
ER
ER
Ho
ld
LEN001 (No. 1)
N
E
C
...
...
...
55
JK
JK
LL
...
...
...
AB
ABC
C
77
PQ
PQ
...
...
...
11
T0
...
...
LEN000 (No. 0)
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
T2
T3
206
26
27
28
29
T0
T1
T2
T3
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
R2
R3
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(1)

(a) PN-PW00 Power Option
MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (PN-PW00 Power Option)

NOTE:
When using PN-PW00 card, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with
the PN-PW00 card.
INSTALLATION CABLE
TO SN716 DESKCON
MDF
PIM0
NOTE
R0
T0
26
26
PN-8DLC/4DLC
LEN000 (No. 0)
LTC0
ROSETTE
5
48 V
2
1
E
48 V
LT00
NOTE
MODULAR CONNECTOR
PN-PW00
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
48 V
E
48 V
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
R0
26
LTC0 (P)
T0
26
T0
R0
207
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(b) AC Adapter Power Option
MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (AC Adapter Power Option)
INSTALLATION CABLE
PIM0
LTC0
MDF
ROSETTE
E
PN-8DLC/4DLC
LEN000
(No. 0)
R0
T0
26
26
TO SN716 DESKCON
2
1
LT00
MODULAR CONNECTOR
24 V AC ADAPTER
TO COMMERCIAL
AC OUTLET
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
-27V
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
R0
26
LTC0 (P)
T0
26
T0
R0
208
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(2)
Mounting of Handset
(a) When mounting at the left side of the SN716 DESKCON (Standard)
STEP1: Let the handset cord through the hole on the side of the handset support fitting as shown below.
CAUTION
Handle the cord with care not to snap a hook on the modular of the cord, when you let the cord
through the hole.
Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON
(01)
(02)
(03)
LDN
(13)
TIE
(14)
Busy
(15)
ATND
(16)
NANS
(17)
Recall
(18)
EMG
BV
TRKSL
Call Park
SC
SVC
(04)
PAGE
REC
Start
Mute
Night
(21)
Position Busy
Cancel
L6 (12)
Volume
(24)
1
L4 (10)
L3 (09)
L5 (11)
DEST
SRC
(19)
Talk
(22)
(20)
Release
Hold
Answer
(26)
(23)
(25)
L2 (08)
L1 (07)
HANDSET CORD
(DESK CONSOLE SIDE)
(HANDSET SIDE)
209
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
<TOP VIEW>
<BOTTOM VIEW>
HOLE
<SIDE VIEW>
210
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
STEP2: Plug the modular into HAND H/S0 jack, and trail the cord along the groove at the bottom of the
console (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).
HANDSET CORD
HAND
H/S0 (for Handset/Headset)
H/S1 (for Headset only)
211
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(b) When mounting at the right side of the SN716 DESKCON
Mounting of Handset to SN716 DESKCON

STEP1: Remove the metal plate from the Handset, turn it over, and mount it to the Handset again.
Turn over the metal plate.
When mounting at the right side

Screw (1)
When mounting at the left side

Screw (2)
Screw (5)
Handset
Handset
Screw (4)
Screw (3)
Screw (3)
Screw (4)
Metal Plate
Screw (2)
Screw (5)
Screw (1)
Metal Plate
Desk Console
STEP2: Put the Handset code through the hole as shown below.
Handset code
(Handset side)
(DESK CONSOLE side)
Hole
<SIDE VIEW>
212
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
STEP3: Fit the three small holes of the handset support fitting to the projections on the bottom of the
console, and fix the fitting by three screws.
CAUTION
Do not screw too firmly to avoid damage to the console.

HANDSET CORD
PROJECTION
PROJECTION
HANDSET SUPPORT
213
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
Mounting of Handset (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE)
<BOTTOM VIEW>
<TOP VIEW>
STEP4: Plug the modular into HAND H/S0 jack (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).
Code
HAND
H/S0 (for Handset/Headset)
H/S1 (for Headset only)
214
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
STEP5: Fit the three small holes of the handset support fitting to the projections on the bottom of the
console, and fix the fitting by three screws.
CAUTION
Do not screw too firmly to avoid damage to the console.
Projection
Handset Support
Projection
215
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(3)
Mounting of Headset
Plug the headset into the modular jack (H/S0 or H/S1) located at the bottom of the console, if
required.
Headset Installation for SN716 DESKCON

Head Band
Slide
Slide
Capsule Unit
(Microphone and
Speaker)
Ear Pad
Slide
Closing
Clip
Voice Tube
Quick Disconnect
PIN1
Modular Plug NOTE
PIN1 TX (+)
2 RX
3 RX
4 TX ()
HAND
H/S0
H/S1
NOTE:
In daily use, use Quick Disconnect when connecting/disconnecting the Headset.
216
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(4)
Cable Connection to SN716 DESKCON

Plug the line cord into the modular jack (LINE) located at the bottom of the console. For the MDF
cross connection for the SN716 DESKCON. Refer to MDF Cross Connection for SN716
DESKCON (PN-PW00 Power Option).
Page 207
Cable Connection to SN716 DESKCON
LINE CORD (6-core)
PAGE REC LINE
(8-core)
(6-core)
(8-core)
3P
PBX
MDF
MODULAR
TERMINAL
3P
1P
8DLC/
4DLC
SN716 DESKCON
2P
PW00
217
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(5)
Connection of AC-DC Adapter

When using an AC-DC ADAPTER for power supply, plug the AC-DC ADAPTER into the 12-24
V DC terminal located at the rear of the console.
AC-DC ADAPTER Connection to SN716 DESKCON
12~24 V DC
RS-232
AC-DC ADAPTER
218
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(6)
Connection of Recording Equipment

The following equipment is required for using recording function:
Tape Recorder with MIC and Remote Connections
Cross Connect Wire
8-Core Modular Block (RJ45)
8-Core Modular Cable
As shown in the following figure, connect cross connect wire to MIC Jack and Remote Jack, then
connect other end of wire to 8-core modular block. And connect one end of 8-core modular cable to
DESKCON REC connector, connect the other end to 8-core block.
Cable Connection for Recording Equipment

8-Core
ModularCable
MODULAR
BLOCK(RJ45)
TAPERECORDER
1P
MICJACK
1P
REMOTE
JACK
CrossConnectWire
REC(8-Core)
DESKCONSOLE
(Bottomview)
MODULAR
BLOCK(RJ45)
SN716DESKCON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TAPERECORDER
MICJack
RemoteJack
8-core
Modular
Cable
Cross
Connect
Wire
Page 220
219
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
8-CORE LINE CABLE (INSTALLATION CABLE)

NOTE
8-pin Modular Connector

8-pin Modular Connector
(Rosette side)
(DESK CONSOLE side)

8-core Line Cable (Installation Cable)
Pin No.
12345678
NOTE:
Pin No.
LEAD NAME
MEANING
Speech
Speech
Not used
Not used
KA
Recording Start Signal (Relay Contact)
KB
Recording Start Signal (Relay Contact)
Not used
Not used
Cut the cable in proper length. Attach the modular connector to both sides of the 8-core
line cable using installation tool.
220
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(7)
Configuration Menu
Configuration Menu is used to assign configuration data for the SN716 DESKCON. The menu has
the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
NOTE:
HEADSET/HANDSET
HEADSET TYPE
MUTE
REC CONTROL
PAGE CONTROL
SUP CONNECTION NOTE
REC VOLUME NOTE
BLF NOTE
HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP
2ND RINGING
RINGING
RECEIVER VOL SET
FUNCTION KEY SWAP NOTE
RINGER VOLUME IN PB NOTE
POWER CONTROL
CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS
This item can not be used for the NEAX 2000 IPS.
(a) Displaying Configuration Menu

Press the L4, L5 and SRC key simultaneously and turn on the power (Plug the AC/DC adapter
of the SN716 DESKCON in AC outlet).
Displaying the Configuration Menu
Position
Busy
Night
NANS
Recall
PAGE
REC
SC
SVC
Start
Mute
Position
Alarm Available
LDN
TIE
EMG
BV
Busy
ATND
TRKSL Call Park
Position Busy lamp

Night
Position Busy
SRC key
Cancel
L6
L5 key
L4 key
L4
L3
L2 key
2
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ
L5
L2
DEST
SRC
Talk
Release
Hold
Answer
L1
221
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
The first page of Configuration Menu appears on the LCD. Configuration Menu has a total of five
or six pages.
1st Page
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x
SRC: prev page
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE
Release: exit
3: MUTE
Answer: update
SRC: prev page
1: REC CONTROL
DEST: next page
2: PAGE CONTROL
Release: exit
3: SUP CONNECTION
Answer: update
SRC: prev page
1: REC VOLUME
DEST: next page
2: BLF
Release: exit
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP
Answer: update
SRC: prev page
1: 2ND RINGING
DEST: next page
2: RINGING
Release: exit
3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET
Answer: update
SRC: prev page
1: FUNCTION KEY SWAP
DEST: next page
2: RINGER VOLUME IN PB
Release: exit
3: POWER CONTROL
Answer: update
SRC: prev page
1: CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS
DEST: next page
2nd Page
3rd Page
4th Page
5th Page
6th Page
Release: exit
Answer: update
222
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
STEP1: When pressing the DEST key, the display changes to the next page. When returning to the previous page, press the SRC key.
STEP2: When pressing the Release key, Configuration Menu disappears and the SN716 DESKCON returns to normal operation.
(b) Selection of Configuration Item
By using a numeric key, press the desired number in Configuration Menu. A menu for assigning
configuration data appears. Assign configuration data referring to Assignment of Configuration
Data on the next page.
Selecting a Configuration Item
Position
Alarm Available
LDN
TIE
EMG
BV
Position
Night
Busy
Busy
ATND
NANS
TRKSL Call Park SC
Night
Recall
PAGE
REC
SVC
Start
Mute Position Busy
SRC key
Cancel
L6
1
L5
L4
L3
2
ABC
3
DEF
SRC
DEST
Talk
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
7
PQRS
TUV
9
WXYZ
L2
Release
Hold
Answer
DEST key
Answer key
L1
Numeric keys
Release key
223
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(c) Assignment of Configuration Data

This section explains how to assign each configuration data. When assigning configuration data,
the following shaded keys are used.
Assigning Configuration Data
Position
Alarm Available
LDN
TIE
EMG
BV
Busy
ATND
TRKSL Call Park
Position
Busy
Night
NANS
Recall
PAGE
REC
SC
SVC
Start
Mute
Night
Position Busy
SRC key
Cancel
L6
1
2
ABC
3
DEF
L4
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
L3
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ
L5
L2
SRC
DEST
Talk
DEST key
Release
Hold
Answer
L1
Numeric keys
224
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(d) Updating Configuration Data

After assigning the configuration data, take the next step as below:
- To update the configuration data
While one of configuration menus is displayed on the LCD, press Answer key. (DESK CONSOLE
is automatically restarted.)
- To cancel update
Press Release key.
Updating Configuration Data
Position
Alarm Available
LDN
TIE
EMG
BV
Busy
ATND
TRKSL Call Park
Position
Busy
Night
NANS
Recall
PAGE
REC
SC
SVC
Start
Mute Position Busy
Cancel
L6
1
L5
L4
L3
Night
2
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ
L2
SRC
DEST
Talk
Release
Hold
Answer
Answer key (Update)
L1
Release key (Cancel)
225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(e) Configuration Data Assignment of Each Item

<Headset/Handset>
This item specifies an optional handset/headset connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.
NOTE:
When using HAND H/S1 connector, this data assignment is not required.
STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P1.
Page 221
SRC: prev page
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE
Release: exit
3: MUTE
Answer: update
STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (HEADSET/HANDSET).

STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[HEADSET/HANDSET]
SRC: menu
* 1: HEADSET
2: HANDSET
Default setting:
1:HEADSET
1.
Headset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.
2.
Handset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.
STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
SRC: prev page
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE
Release: exit
3: MUTE
Answer: update
STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.

When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
226
Page 225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
<Headset Type>
This item specifies the type of headset connected to the HAND H/S1 or H/S0 connector.
Page 221
SRC: prev page
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE
Release: exit
3: MUTE
Answer: update
STEP2: Press the numeric key 2 (HEADSET TYPE).

[HEADSET TYPE]
SRC: menu
* 1: SUPRA NEW SIGMA
Default setting:
2: SUPRA POLARIS Series
1:SUPRA NEW
SIGMA
3: GN2200 Series
1.
The type of Headset is SUPRA F53U-U03F.
2.
The type of Headset is P51N-U10P SUPRA NC POLARIS or others.
3.
The type of Headset is GN2200 .
SRC: prev page
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE
Release: exit
3: MUTE
Answer: update

227
Page 225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
<Mute>
This item specifies On/Off setting of the mute function for the HAND H/S0 or H/S1 connector.
If the Mute key is pressed while the mute function is set to On, the voice at the DESKCON side
is not sent to the other party.
Page 221
SRC: prev page
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE
Release: exit
3: MUTE
Answer: update
STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (MUTE).

[MUTE]
SRC: menu
* 1: H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON

2: H/S0 ON, H/S1OFF
Default setting:
1:H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON
3: H/S0 OFF, H/S1 ON

1.
Both H/S0 and H/S1 are set to On
2.
Only H/S0 is set to On
3.
Only H/S1 is set to On
SRC: prev page
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE
Release: exit
3: MUTE
Answer: update

228
Page 225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
<REC Control>
This item specifies the operation mode of a recording equipment. The following two types of
modes are available:
Manual mode:
Manual mode is available when the recording equipment has a remote connection function.
When the REC key is pressed, the system starts recording. When the REC key is pressed again,
the recording stops.
Automatic mode:
In automatic mode, the system starts/ends recording automatically when a call is connected/
disconnected. Note that the REC key is not effective in Automatic mode.
Page 221

1: REC CONTROL
2: PAGE CONTROL
3: SUP CONNECTION
SRC: prev page

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update
STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (REC CONTROL).

[REC CONTROL]
* 1: MANUAL
2: AUTO
1.
Manual mode
2.
Automatic mode
SRC: menu
Default setting:
1:MANUAL
1: REC CONTROL
2: PAGE CONTROL
3: SUP CONNECTION
SRC: prev page

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

When returning previous item, press the SRC key.
229
Page 225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
<REC Volume>
This item specifies the recording level of the received voice from the other party. Note that the
voice level at the operator side cannot be adjusted.
Page 221
SRC: prev page
1: REC VOLUME
DEST: next page
2: BLF
Release: exit
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (REC VOLUME).
[REC VOLUME ADJUSTMENT] SRC: menu
1: +2dB
4:-8dB
Default setting: 2:0dB
* 2: 0dB
3: -4dB
1.
+2dB Up
2.
0dB (Standard level)
3.
-4dB Down
4.
-8dB Down
SRC: prev page
1: REC VOLUME
DEST: next page
2: BLF
Release: exit

230
Page 225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
<Hold/Start/Release Swap>
This item specifies the locations of Hold, Start, and Release key.
Page 221
SRC: prev page
1: REC VOLUME
DEST: next page
2: BLF
Release: exit

STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP).
[HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP] SRC: menu
* 1: ORIGINAL
2: SWAPPED
1.
Original setting
2.
Swapped setting NOTE
NOTE:
Default setting:
1:ORIGINAL
The locations of each key changes as shown below.
ORIGINAL SETTING
SWAPPED SETTING
Hold
Start
Start
Release
Release
Hold
SRC: prev page
1: REC VOLUME
DEST: next page
2: BLF
Release: exit

231
Page 225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
<2nd Ringing>
This item specifies on/off setting of the 2nd ringing.
Page 221
SRC: prev page
1: 2ND RINGING
DEST: next page
2: RINGING
Release: exit
Answer: update
STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (2ND RINGING).

[2ND RINGING]
SRC: menu
* 1: ENABLE
2: DISABLE
1.
2nd Ringing is available.
2.
2nd Ringing is not available.
Default setting:
1:ENABLE
SRC: prev page
1: 2ND RINGING
DEST: next page
2: RINGING
Release: exit
Answer: update

232
Page 225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
<Ringing>
This item specifies on/off setting of the ringing.
Page 221
SRC: prev page
1: 2ND RINGING
DEST: next page
2: RINGING
Release: exit
Answer: update
STEP2: Press the numeric key 2 (RINGING).

[RINGING]
SRC: menu
* 1: ENABLE
2: DISABLE
1.
Ringing is available.
2.
Ringing is not available.
Default setting:
1:ENABLE
SRC: prev page
1: 2ND RINGING
DEST: next page
2: RINGING
Release: exit
Answer: update

233
Page 225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
<Receiver Volume Set>

This item specifies the receiver volume.
Page 221
SRC: prev page
1: 2ND RINGING
DEST: next page
2: RINGING
Release: exit
Answer: update
STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (RECEIVER VOLUME SET).

[RECEIVER VOLUME SET]
SRC: menu
* 1: SYSTEM DEFAULT
4: QUIET PLACE
2: DEFAULT BY CALL
Default setting:
1:SYSTEM DEFAULT
3: SAME AS PREVIOUS CALL

1.
When specifying 1:SYSTEM DEFAULT, the receiver volume is set to the default level of the
DLC card.
2.
When specifying 2:DEFAULT BY CALL, the receiver volume is set to the level in accordance
with the system default.
3.
When specifying 3:SAME AS PREVIOUS CALL, the receiver volume is set to the level
adjusted by the UP/DOWN key.
4.
When specifying 4:QUIET PLACE, the receiver volume is set to the level (-8dB) lower than
System Default.
SRC: prev page
1: 2ND RINGING
DEST: next page
2: RINGING
Release: exit
Answer: update

234
Page 225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
<Power Control>
This item specifies the power control of the SN716 DESKCON in night mode.
Page 221
SRC: prev page
DEST: next page
Release: exit
3: POWER CONTROL
Answer: update
STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (POWER CONTROL).

[POWER CONTROL]
SRC: menu
* 1: NORMAL
2: LOW POWER (PUT OUT LCD)
Default setting:
1:NORMAL
1.
Power control is not effective.
2.
The LCD back light is put out. When pressing an any key, the LCD back light is put on, the light
is put out again after 30 seconds.
SRC: prev page
DEST: next page
Release: exit
3: POWER CONTROL
Answer: update

235
Page 225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
<Conf. Tone For All Keys>

This item specifies the confirmation tone control for all keys of the SN716 DESKCON.
Page 221
SRC: prev page
DEST: next page

Release: exit
Answer: update
STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS).
[CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS]
SRC: menu
* 1: ENABLE
2: DISABLE
Default setting:
1:ENABLE
3: SYSTEM
1.
Confirmation tone is enable for all keys.
2.
Confirmation tone is disable for all keys.
3.
Confirmation tone is controlled by the system.
SRC: prev page
DEST: next page

Release: exit
Answer: update

236
Page 225
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

(1)

Standard Line (PN-8DLC/PN-4DLC)
MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (Standard Line)

PIM0
LTC0
PN-8DLC
LEN000
(No. 0)
LEN001
(No. 1)
LT00
R0
T0
26
26
R1
T1
27
27
LEN006
(No. 6)
LEN007
(No. 7)
R6
T6
32
MDF
MODULAR CONNECTOR
32
T7
33
33
LTC0 (J)
LEN006
LEN007
1
2
7
8
TO SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON
R7
LEN000
LEN001
ROSETTE
R0
R1
R6
R7
26
27
32
33
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
T6
T7
237
26
27
32
33
T0
T1
T6
T7
1
2
7
8
R0
R1
R6
R7
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)
Long Line (PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN)
MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (Long Line)

PIM0
LTC0
LEN000 (No. 0)
LEN001 (No. 1)
LT00
MDF
R0
T0
26
26
R1
T1
27
27
28
28
29
29
PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
TO SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON
MODULAR CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
ROSETTE
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
238
26
27
28
29
T0
T1
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
(2)
Handling
Installation of SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON
STEP1: To provide the console with the headset in place of the handset, unplug the modular cord from
the handset and then plug the modular cord to the Jack Set.
Jack Set Installation for SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON
SN708/709/712/741
ATTCON
MODULAR
CORD
JACK SET
239
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
STEP2: Set the switch located inside the console according to the type of headset/handset connected.
Refer to next page.
Page 241
Switch Setting on the SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

Slide the directory out of the way.
Then insert a flat screw drivers blade into the notched opening and apply light upward pressure until
the access panel is clear of the front lip. At the same time apply pressure (toward you) at the rear of
the pedestal to move the access panel.
ACCESS PANEL
DIRECTORY
240
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Switch Setting on SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

Set the switch according to the type of headset/handset connected.
C: Carbon Type Handset/Headset
S: SUPRA Headset
D: Dterm Type Handset
Replace the directory and access panel.
SWITCH
D
241
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
STEP3: Plug the line cord into the modular jack located at the bottom of the console.
Cable Connection to SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

LINE CORD
MODULAR
TERMINAL
1P
PBX
MDF
1P
1P
DLC
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON
242
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
STEP4: Screw the handset support onto the bottom of the console as shown below.
Mounting of Handset Support to SN708/709/712 ATTCON
HANDSET
SUPPORT
SN708/709/712 ATTCON
243
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
For SN741 ATTCON, use the modular cord clamp provided with the handset support to dispose the
straight part of the handset modular cord as shown below.
Mounting of Handset Support to SN741 ATTCON
MODULAR CORD CLAMP
SN741 ATTCON
HANDSET SUPPORT
MODULAR CORD
244
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP)
Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP)

MDF Cross Connection for Day/Night Mode Change by External Key
When using PN-DK00
PIM0
LTC0
MDF
K0
K0
K1
26
26
K1
K2
K2
K3
27
27
K3
K4
K4
K5
28
28
K5
K6
K6
K7
29
29
K7
PN-DK00
TO KEYS
LEN000
LT00
LEN002
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
K1
K3
K5
K7
26
27
28
29
K1
K3
K5
K7
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
When using DK on PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D

PBX
External Key
PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D
245
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
External TAS Indicator (DK)

(1)
Connection Outline
External TAS Indicator Connection Outline

When using PN-DK00
PBX
MDF
PN-DK00
TAS Indicator with Battery

IND
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
G
G
PBX
PN-DK00
MDF
TAS Indicator with Battery

(Ground Start)
IND
246
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
(2)

When using a TAS Indicator with a Battery
MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery

PIM0
LTC0
PN-DK00
LEN000
LT00
LEN002
K0
K1
26
26
K2
K3
27
27
K4
K5
28
28
K6
K7
29
29
TAS INDICATOR
WITH BATTERY
MDF
K0
IND
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
27 V
G
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
K1
K3
K5
K7
247
26
27
28
29
K1
K3
K5
K7
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
When using a TAS Indicator with a Battery (Ground Start)
MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery (Ground Start)
PIM0
TAS INDICATOR
WITH BATTERY
(GROUND START)
LTC0
PN-DK00
LEN000
LT00
LEN002
K0
K1
26
26
K2
K3
27
27
K4
K5
28
28
K6
K7
29
29
MDF
K0
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
26
27
28
29
IND
LTC0 (P)
K1
K3
K5
K7
248
26
27
28
29
K1
K3
K5
K7
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)

(1)
Requirement for Customer-owned Paging Equipment

Input Impedance
: 600
Control Method
: Start - Ground Start NOTE
Stop - Ground Off (Open)
NOTE:
(2)
The current capacity of relay contact (PN-DK00 card) is 0.125 A.
Connection Outline
Paging Equipment Connection Outline

When using PN-8COT and PN-DK00
PBX
For Amplifier Input
MDF
PN-8COT
Paging Equipment
PN-DK00
For Control
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
G
G
249
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
Paging Equipment Connection Outline

When using PN-8COT and DK on PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D
PBX
For Amplifier Input
MDF
PN-8COT
Paging Equipment
PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D
For Control
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
G
G
250
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
(3)
MDF Cross Connection for Paging Equipment

PIM0
J
LTC0
P
K0
K1
26
26
K2
K3
27
27
K4
K5
28
28
K6
K7
29
29
R0
T0
34
34
PN-DK00
LEN000
LT00
LEN002
MDF
PN-8COT
LEN008
(No. 0)
LT01
LEN014
(No. 6)
LEN015
(No. 7)
PAGING EQUIPMENT
G
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
R6
15
15
T6
40
40
R7
16
16
Ring
T7
41
41
Tip
SPEAKER
SPEECH
PATH
CIRCUIT
G
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
G
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
LEN008
LEN009
LEN015
LEN016
LTC0 (P)
1
2
3
4
K0
26
27
28
29
26
27
28
29
9
10
R0
R1
34
35
T0
T1
34
35
14
15
R6
R7
40
41
T6
T7
40
41
251
1
2
3
4
K0
T0
T1
9
10
R0
R1
T6
T7
14
15
R6
R7
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

(1)
Requirement for Customer-owned External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

Output level
: Less than 0 dbm (Adjustable)
Output impedance : Less than 1 k (When using PN-4COT/8COT and PN-DK00)
: Less than 10 k (When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA)
Control Method
: Start - Ground Start NOTE 1
: Stop - Ground Off (Open)
NOTE 1: The current capacity of relay contact (PN-DK00 card) is 0.125 A.

NOTE 2: When connecting the external tone source/announcement machine using the PN-4COT/8COT
and PN-DK00 cards, an appropriate diode must be installed on the MDF, as shown on the next
page.
Page 253
252
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
(2)
Connection Outline
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Connection Outline

When using PN-8COT and PN-DK00
PBX
MDF
PN-8COT
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine
Diode *
PN-DK00
* Rating for the Diode

VR Less than 50 V
IO More than 20 mA
VF Less than 1.0 V
When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA

PBX
PN-TNTA
JACK0
JACK1
When using Pin Jack on PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D

PBX
PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D
JACK
NOTE:
When connecting the external hold tone source to Pin Jack on MP card (PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D), set JP1 on the MP card to RIGHT position.
Page 292
253
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
(3)
MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

PIM0
J
K0
K1
26
26
K2
K3
27
27
K4
K5
28
28
K6
K7
29
29
R0
T0
34
34
R6
15
15
T6
40
40
R7
16
16
Ring
T7
41
41
Tip
PN-DK00
LEN000
LT00
LEN002
MDF
LTC0
P
PN-8COT
LEN008
(No. 0)
LT01
LEN014
(No. 6)
LEN015
(No. 7)
EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/

ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE
K0
G
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
SPEECH
PATH
CIRCUIT
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
G
254
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
LEN008
LEN009
LEN015
LEN016
LTC0 (P)
1
2
3
4
K0
26
27
28
29
26
27
28
29
9
10
R0
R1
34
35
T0
T1
34
35
14
15
R6
R7
40
41
T6
T7
40
41
255
1
2
3
4
K0
T0
T1
9
10
R0
R1
T6
T7
14
15
R6
R7
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
If a D.C. voltage is supplied with the tone from the external tone source/announcement machine, a
transformer or coupling capacitor should be used as shown below.
Connecting External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Supplied with D.C.

Ring
TRANSFORMER
CAPACITOR
2 F
SOURCE
R
TO COT
TO PBX
DC
VOLTAGE
SOURCE
Tip
Ring

TO CONTROL CIRCUIT
FROM PN-DK00
CAPACITOR
2 F
SOURCE
R
TO COT
TO PBX
DC
VOLTAGE
SOURCE
Tip

TO CONTROL CIRCUIT
FROM PN-DK00
256
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
External BGM Source (COT/TNT)

The system can connect a maximum of 10 customer-owned BGM sources.
(1)
Connection Outline
External BGM Sources Connection Outline

When using PN-8COT
PN-8COT
MDF
BGM SOURCE
#0
BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE
#1
When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA

PN-TNTA
BGM SOURCE
#0
JACK0
BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE
#1
JACK1
257
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
(2)

When using PN-8COT
MDF Cross Connection for External BGM Sources

PIM0
LTC0
PN-8COT
LT00
LEN000
(No. 0)
LEN001
(No. 1)
R0
T0
26
26
#0
R1
BGM SOURCE
T1
27
27
#0
#1
R6
T6
32
32
R7
T7
33
33
LEN006
(No. 6)
LEN007
(No. 7)
MDF
BGM SOURCE
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN006
LEN007
LTC0 (P)
1
2
R0
R1
26
27
T0
T1
26
27
T0
T1
1
2
R0
R1
7
8
R6
R7
32
33
T6
T7
32
33
T6
T7
7
8
R6
R7
258
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

(1)
Connection Outline
PFT Connection Outline

PZ-8PFTB
PBX
TEL
MDF
MDF
PN-8LC
PN-8COT
259
MDF
MDF
TO C.O.
LINE
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
(2)
Installation of PZ-8PFTB
STEP1: Mount the PZ-8PFTB card into the PFT slot of the PIM.
STEP2: Connect the champ connectors of 25-pair cables to the PFT0 and PFT1 connectors on the PZ8PFTB card as shown below.
Connection of 25-Pair Cable and PZ-8PFTB

PFT1 CONNECTOR
CHAMP CONNECTOR ATTACHED TO PZ-8PFTB
PZ-8PFTB
PFT0 CONNECTOR
25-PAIR CABLE
To MDF
260
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
STEP3: Connect the 25-pair cables on the MDF.

This figure shows the PFT connector pin assignment for each PFT circuit number
(No. 0 - No. 7).
PFT Connector Pin Assignment

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
PFT0
Sta. R0
26
8LC. R0 27
C.O. R0 28
8COT. R0 29
Sta. R1
30
8LC. R1 31
C.O. R1 32
8COT. R1 33
Sta. R2
34
8LC. R2 35
C.O. R2 36
8COT. R2 37
Sta. R3
38
8LC. R3 39
C.O. R3 40
8COT. R3 41
Sta. R4
42
8LC. R4 43
C.O. R4 44
8COT. R4 45
Sta. R5
46
8LC. R5 47
C.O. R5 48
8COT. R5 49
50
Sta. T0
8LC. T0
C.O. T0
8COT. T0
Sta. T1
8LC. T1
C.O. T1
8COT. T1
Sta. T2
8LC. T2
C.O. T2
8COT. T2
Sta. T3
8LC. T3
C.O. T3
8COT. T3
Sta. T4
8LC. T4
C.O. T4
8COT. T4
Sta. T5
8LC. T5
C.O. T5
8COT. T5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
261
PFT1
Sta. R6
26
8LC. R6 27
C.O. R6 28
8COT. R6 29
Sta. R7
30
8LC. R7 31
C.O. R7 32
8COT. R7 33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Sta. T6
8LC. T6
C.O. T6
8COT. T6
Sta. T7
8LC. T7
C.O. T7
8COT. T7
No. 6
No. 7
MJ
E
27 V
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
This figure shows MDF cross connection for No. 0 circuit on the PZ-8PFTB.
MDF Cross Connection for PFT

MDF
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
PIM0
J
LTC0
P
LEN000
(No. 0)
R0
T0
1
26
1
26
LEN001
(No. 1)
R1
T1
2
27
2
27
LEN007
(No. 7)
R7
T7
8
33
8
33
PN-8COT
R0
LEN008
T0
(No. 0)
9
34
9
34
LEN009
(No. 1)
R1
T1
10
35
10
35
LEN015
(No. 7)
R7
T7
16
41
16
41
PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D
PN-8LC
LT00
LT01
MJ
MN
25
50
TO C.O. LINE
TO STATION
PZ-8PFTB
PFT0
Sta. R0
Sta. T0
1
26
8LC. R0
8LC. T0
2
27
No. 0
C.O. R0
C.O. T0
3
28
8COT. R0
8COT. T0
4
29
PFT1
25
50
23
48
MJ
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
27 V
24
49
25
50
27 V
J
INSTALLATION CABLE
262
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
MDF Cross Connection for PFT

1
PFT0 CONNECTOR
PFT0 (J)
1
2
3
4
Sta. R0
8LC. R0
C.O. R0
8COT. R0
26
27
28
29
PFT0 (P)
Sta. T0
8LC. T0
C.O. T0
8COT. T0
26
27
28
29
Sta. T0
8LC. T0
C.O. T0
8COT. T0
Sta. R0
8LC. R0
C.O. R0
8COT. R0
TO STATION
TO PN-8LC
TO C.O. LINE
TO PN-8COT
PFT1 CONNECTOR
PFT1 (J)
23
24
25
1
2
3
4
PFT1 (P)
48
49
50
MJ
E
27 V
48
49
50
MJ
E
27 V
23
24
25
TO PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/
PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D
TO PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
LTC0 CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LTC0 (P)
LEN000
1
2
3
4
R0
26
27
28
29
T0
26
27
28
29
T0
1
2
3
4
R0
TO PZ-8PFTB
LEN008
9
10
11
12
R0
34
35
36
37
T0
34
35
36
37
T0
9
10
11
12
R0
TO PZ-8PFTB
MJ
TO PZ-8PFTB
24
25
MJ
49
50
MN
49
50
MN
263
24
25
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
Alarm Display Panel (MP)
Alarm Display Panel (MP)

MDF Cross Connection for Alarm Display Panel
ALARM DISPLAY PANEL
PWR
PIM0
MJ
MIN
MDF
LTC0
PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D
MJ
25
25
MN
50
50
FRONT
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
27 V
G
REAR
LTC0 (J)
1
25
LTC0 (P)
26
MJ
50
26
MN
50
264
MN
25
MJ
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP)

The MP card provides two RS-232C interface ports for SMDR/MCI.
No.0/No.1 Port : Async.: 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 bps
Direct connection
Connect the SMDR terminal and/or the VMS to the RS0-RS1 port of the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24C/CP24-D card using the RS RVS-15(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C as shown
below.
SMDR/MCI Terminal Direct Connection

PBX
PN-CP24-A
/CP24-B
/CP24-C
/CP24-D
RS 1
RS 0
TO RS-232C
PORT (25pin)
RS RVS-15(S) CA-A: 15 m (49.2 ft.)
RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.)
SMDR0/SMDR1/
MCI (VMS)
Connection via MODEM

When the cable length between the PBX and the terminal is more than 15 m (49.2 ft.), connect the
SMDR terminal and/or the VMS to the RS0-RS1 port of the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D
card through the MODEMs using the RS NORM-4(S) CA-A as shown below.
SMDR/MCI Terminal Connection via MODEMs

PBX
PN-CP24-A
/CP24-B
/CP24-C
/CP24-D
MODEM
MODEM
2P
TO RS-232C
PORT
RS 1
RS 0
SMDR0/SMDR1/
MCI (VMS)
RS NORM-4 CA-A/
RS NORM-4S CA-A: 4 m (13.1 ft.)
MODEM INTERFACE
CABLE (STRAIGHT)
MORE THAN 15 m (49.2 ft.)
265
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
RS RVS-15 CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A

RS RVS-4 CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-C
RS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-4S CA-C
NOTE:
If the terminal does not send DTR or RTS signal, cut the signal lead marked by in the D-Sub
connector (terminal side) as shown in the wiring diagram below.
See RS-232C Connector Layout.
Page 274
RS RVS-15 CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A: 15 m (49.2 ft.)

D-sub 25pin
(male)
RS RVS-4 CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-C/

RS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-4S CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.)
06D-TXC (1)
15-TXC (2)
06B-RXC
17-RXC
06A-TXC (2)
24-TXC (1)
05C-DTR
06-DSR
05B-GND
01-GND
05A-TXD
03-RXD
04B-RXD
02-TXD
04A-RTS
08-DCD
03B-CTS
05-CTS
03A-DSR
NOTE
02B-GND
02A-DCD
01C-LALB
D
06 TXC (1)
20-DTR
04-RTS
07-GND
18-LALB
13
----
12
----
11
----
10
----
09
----
----
RXC
TXC (2)
08
DCD
05
----
DTR
GND
TXD
07
GND
04
----
----
RXD
RTS
06
DSR
03
----
----
CTS
DSR
05
CTS
02
----
----
GND
DCD
04
RTS
01
----
LALB
----
03
RXD
02
TXD
01
GND
G: GROUND
266
25
----
24
TXC (1)
23
----
22
----
21
----
20
DTR
19
----
18
LALB
17
RXC
16
----
15
TXC (2)
14
----
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
RS NORM-4 CA-A/RS NORM-4S CA-A

Page 274
4 m (13.1 ft.)
D-sub 25pin
(male)
D
06 TXC (1)
06D-TXC (1)
24-TXC (1)
06B-RXC
17-RXC
06A-TXC (2)
15-TXC (2)
05C-DTR
20-DTR
05B-GND
01-GND
05A-TXD
02-TXD
04B-RXD
03-RXD
04A-RTS
04-RTS
03B-CTS
05-CTS
03A-DSR
06-DSR
02B-GND
07-GND
02A-DCD
08-DCD
01C-LALB
18-LALB
13
----
----
RXC
TXC (2)
12
----
05
----
DTR
GND
TXD
11
----
04
----
----
RXD
RTS
10
----
03
----
----
CTS
DSR
09
----
02
----
----
GND
DCD
08
DCD
01
----
LALB
----
07
GND
06
DSR
05
CTS
04
RTS
03
RXD
02
TXD
01
GND
G: GROUND
267
25
----
24
TXC (1)
23
----
22
----
21
----
20
DTR
19
----
18
LALB
17
RXC
16
----
15
TXC (2)
14
----
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
Built-in SMDR/PMS on IP (MP)
Built-in SMDR/PMS on IP (MP)

[Series 3400 software enhancement]
The ETHER card (PZ-M606-A) on the MP card provides on LAN interface port for SMDR/PMS.
Connect the SMDR/PMS terminal to LAN port of the PZ-M606A-A card on the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D card using 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable as shown below.
SMDR/PMS Terminal Connection

PBX
Switching HUB
PN-CP24-A
/CP24-B
/CP24-C
/CP24-D
LAN
TO LAN PORT
SMDR/PMS
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable
PZ-M606-A
The LAN interface specifications are listed below.
Item
Physical layer
Connection layer
TCP/IP protocol
Socket interface
Transport protocol
Application port number
Number of connection
Client/Server
Transmission code
Quasi-normal restriction condition
NOTE:
Specifications
Ethernet
The Ethernet packet format complies with the DIX standard.
ARP,IP,ICMP,UDP,TCP
Complies with 4.3 BSD socket interface
TCP stream type protocol
SMDR : 60010 (fixed)
PMS : 60050 (fixed)
1
Client : SMDR/PMS terminal
Server: PBX
7-bit ASCII code
1. When connection is closed.
2. Status monitoring text
The MP card in Main site communicates with the SMDR/PMS terminal. Therefore, in the communication settings in SMDR/PMS terminal side, set the IP address to connected to the address
specified by office data (CM0BY=00>00 or CM0BY=02>03), and application port number
shown in the above table.
268
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

The PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D card provides 4 RS-232C interface ports for SMDR, PMS, MCI, CIS Printer, Hotel Printer.
(1)
SMDR/PMS/MCI (VMS)
Direct Connection
Connect the terminal to the RS0-RS3 port of the PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D card using the RS RVS15(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C as shown below.
See Page 266 also.
SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Direct Connection

PBX
(PIM0 - PIM7)
RS0 - RS3
PNAP00-B/
AP00-D
TO RS-232C PORT
RS RVS-15(S) CA-A : 15 m (49.2 ft.)

RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.)
SMDR0/SMDR1/
PMS/MCI (VMS)
NOTE
NOTE:
PMS cannot be used with PN-AP00-D card.
269
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

When the cable length between the PBX and the terminal is more than 15 m (49.2 ft), MODEMs are
required. Use RS NORM-4S CA-A as shown below.
See Page 267 also.
SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Connection via MODEMs

INTERFACE CABLE
(FOR STRAIGHT
CONNECTION)
PBX
(PIM0 - PIM7)
RS0 - RS3
2P
PNAP00-B/
AP00-D
TO RS-232C PORT
RS NORM-4 CA-A/
RS NORM-4S CA-A:
4 m (13.1 ft.)
MODEM
MODEM
SMDR0/SMDR1/
PMS/MCI (VMS)
NOTE

MODEM: FULL DUPLEX (4W)
1200 BPS (LEASED TYPE)
NOTE:
PMS cannot be used with PN-AP00-D card.
270
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
(2)
CIS Printer/Hotel Printer

Direct Connection
Connect a maximum of two printers to the PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D using the RS PRT-15(S)
CA-A/RS PRT-15(S) CA-C as shown below.
Printer Direct Connection

PBX
PNAP00-B/
AP00-D
RS0-RS3
CONNECTOR
PRINTER0/PRINTER1
RS PRT-15 CA-A/RS PRT-15S CA-A/

RS PRT-15 CA-C/RS PRT-15S CA-C : 15 m (49.2 ft.)

When the cable length between the printer and the PBX is more than 15 m (49.2 ft.), MODEMs are
required.
Printer Connection via MODEMs

INTERFACE CABLE
(FOR STRAIGHT
CONNECTION)
PBX
PNAP00-B/
AP00-D
RS0-RS3
CONNECTOR
2P
MODEM
RS NORM-4 CA-A/
RS NORM-4S CA-A : 4 m (13.1 ft.)
MODEM
PRINTER0/PRINTER1

MODEM: FULL DUPLEX (4W)
1200 BPS (LEASED TYPE)
271
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
RS PRT-15 CA-A/RS PRT-15S CA-A

Page 274
15 m (49.2 ft.)
05C-DTR
05B-GND
01-GND
05A-TXD
03-RXD
03B-CTS
20-DTR
03A-DSR
02B-GND
07-GND
06
----
----
----
----
05
----
DTR
GND
TXD
04
----
----
----
----
03
----
----
----
DSR
02
----
----
GND
----
01
----
----
----
----
272
13
----
12
----
11
----
10
----
09
----
08
----
07
GND
06
----
05
----
04
----
03
RXD
02
----
01
GND
25
----
24
----
23
----
22
----
21
----
20
DTR
19
----
18
----
17
----
16
----
15
----
14
----
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
RS PRT-15 CA-C/RS PRT-15S CA-C

Page 274
15 m (49.2 ft.)
05B-GND
01-GND
05A-TXD
03-RXD
03A-DSR
20-DTR
02B-GND
07-GND
06
----
----
----
----
05
----
----
GND
TXD
04
----
----
----
----
03
----
----
----
DSR
02
----
----
GND
----
01
----
----
----
----
273
13
----
12
----
11
----
10
----
09
----
08
----
07
GND
06
----
05
----
04
----
03
RXD
02
----
01
GND
25
----
24
----
23
----
22
----
21
----
20
DTR
19
----
18
----
17
----
16
----
15
----
14
----
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
RS-232C Connector Layout

SIGNAL-NAME
PIN
NO. RS-232C JIS C6361 ITU-T
V.24
SIGNAL
DIRECTION
ANOTHER
MEANING
AA
(FG)
101
GND
Frame Ground
BA
SD
103
TXD
BB
RD
104
RXD
CA
RS
105
RTS
CB
CS
106
CTS
DCE
Clear to Send
CC
DR
107
DSR
DCE
Data Set Ready
AB
SG
102
GND
CF
CD
109
DCD
DTE
DCE
DTE
Send Data
Receive Data
Request to Send
Signal Ground
DCE
Data Channel Receive Carrier

Detect
Not Used
10
Not Used
11
PB
Peripheral Busy
12
SCF
BCD
122
DCE
Backward Channel Receive Carrier

Detect
13
SCB
BCS
121
DCE
Backward Channel Send (OK)
14
SBA
BSD
118
15
DB
ST2
114
16
SBB
BRD
119
17
DD
RT
115
DTE
TXC (2)
RXC
Backward Channel Send Data
DCE
Send Signal Element Timing
DCE
Backward Channel Receive Data
DCE
Receive Signal Element Timing
18
Not Used
19
SCA
BRS
120
20
CD
ER
108/2
21
CG
SQD
110
22
CE
CI
125
23
CI, CH
SRS
112, 111
24
DA
ST1
113
DTR
RI
DTE
Backward Channel Send Detect
DTE
Data Terminal Ready
DCE
Data Signal Quality Detect
DCE
Call Indication
TXC (1)
25
DCE
Data Signal Speed Choice

Send Signal Element Timing
Not Used
274
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS

(1)
Before mounting the circuit cards, confirm the following items.

ATTENTION
Wrist Strap is connected to Frame Ground.

See CHAPTER 2 Static Electricity Guard.
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Page 63
Switch settings of circuit cards are already completed. See CHAPTER 3.
Page 289
The SW1 switches of all PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards are turned off.

(2)
Mount circuit cards into their mounting positions according to the Bay Face Layout and Port
Assignment Table given in the Office Data Programming Manual. See CHAPTER 1 MOUNTING
CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS.
Page 45
This figure shows the mounting method of circuit cards.
Mounting of Circuit Cards
TO FRAME GROUND CONNECTION
WRIST STRAP
CARD FRONT SIDE
275
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
(3)
Fix the CARD STOPPER according to the following procedure.
STEP1: After mounting all circuit cards slide the CARD STOPPER to the left.
STEP2: Tighten the screws of the CARD STOPPER as shown below.
NOTE:
When sliding the PIM CARD STOPPER, loosen all of the screws securing the PIM CARD
STOPPER and the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card (the screws need not to be removed).
Installation of the CARD STOPPER

CIRCUIT CARD
CARD
STOPPER
CIRCUIT CARD
SCREW
SCREW
SLIDE THE CARD

STOPPER TO THE LEFT.
276
CARD
STOPPER
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
There are two methods for System Initialization. The first method is to Clear All Data,
except LEN000 as a CAT terminal, and then program the System Data. The second
method is to use the Resident System Program, which causes the system to configure
itself automatically to the default settings, wherever the line/trunk cards are installed.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
NOTE 1: See CHAPTER 3 for MP switch settings.

Page 292
NOTE 2: Refer to the Command Manual for default settings on the Resident System Program.
All Clear, Except LEN000 CAT

STEP1: Turn on the SW1 switch on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
- The ON lamp must be lit on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
STEP2: On the MP Card, set SW3 to B and press SW1.
STEP3: When the MN lamp on the system is lit, set SW3 to the 0 position.
Resident System Program

STEP1: Mount the line/trunk cards into PIM.
STEP2: Turn on the SW1 switch on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
- The ON lamp must be lit on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
STEP3: On the MP card, set SW3 to C and press SW1.
- After 30 to 40 seconds, the MN lamp turns on.
- The system has loaded the Resident System Program.
NOTE:
If the MJ lamp is lit, repeat Step 3.
STEP4: On the MP card, set SW3 to the 0 position.
277
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY

There are two methods for data entry, using a Customer Administration Terminal (CAT)
or a Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT).
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
NOTE:
For assigning system data, refer to the Command Manual.
CAT
Any Dterm can be assigned as a CAT through programming. The Dterm can still be used as a regular telephone when it is not in CAT mode. If the system is initialized by C (Resident System Program), every
Dterm will be able to go into CAT mode. If the system is initialized by B (All Clear), only LEN000 is
assigned as a CAT port (the DLC card must be installed in slot LT00).
To use a Dterm as a CAT, follow the procedures shown below.
NOTE:
It is necessary to complete Steps 1 through 6 within 4 seconds.
To set CAT mode:

1.
Press TRF or Transfer
2.
Press CNF or Conf

- CNF/Conf lamp flashes
3.
Press *
- CNF/Conf lamp is off
4.
Press TRF or Transfer
5.
Press CNF or Conf

- CNF/Conf lamp flashes
6.
Press #
- CNF/Conf, SPKR/Speaker, FNC/Feature lamps are lit
- CAT MODE is displayed on the LCD
7.
Press LNR/SPD or Redial

- COMMAND = - is displayed on the LCD
278
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY
To reset CAT mode:

While COMMAND = - is displayed on the LCD:
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
1.
Lift the handset (off hook)

-SPKR/Speaker lamp turns off.
2.
Restore the handset (on hook)

-CNF/Conf, FNC/Feature lamps turn off.
-LCD returns to clock.
Handling
MAT
Refer to the MATWorX User Guide.
Confirming Lamp Indication

After system data entry, confirm proper operation of the system using indicator lamps.
RUN Lamp Flashing (120 IPM)
Check that the RUN lamps of PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D card and other application circuit cards are flashing.
ON Lamps of All PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards Lightning
Check that the ON lamps of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards are lightning and their MJ/MN
lamps have gone out.
BL Lamps Gone Out
Check that the BL lamps of all the line/trunk circuit cards have gone out. If BL lamps are flashing,
it means that the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or the system data for this card is not
assigned.
For more details of lamp indication, see CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS. For information of maintenance servicing and troubleshooting of the equipment, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
279
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
OPERATION TEST
OPERATION TEST
Confirm the entered system data and hardware, including cable connection, by completing the following
operational tests.
Basic Connection Test at MDF
Station Line Test (Operator Call from all stations)
Central Office Trunk Test (Incoming, Outgoing)
Tie Line Trunk Test (Incoming, Outgoing)
Service Feature Test
Call Transfer
Step Call
Executive Right of Way (Executive Override)
Call Hold
Call Back
Call Forwarding-All Calls/Dont Answer (No Answer)/Busy Line
Call Pickup
Station Hunting-Pilot/Circular
Speed Calling-Station/System (Station Speed Dialing/System Speed Dialing)
Paging Access (External Paging with Meet-me)
Announcement Service
Other selected features
NOTE:
Feature names in the parenthesis are for North America.
280
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
SYSTEM DATA SAVE/CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK
SYSTEM DATA SAVE

After system data entry, save the system data to floppy diskette. Refer to Maintenance Manual for the
operation of system data save.
CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK

Cleaning
Clean the following places:
Inside of the main equipment, especially the bottom of the base.

On the Top Cover.
Around the Main Equipment and the MDF.
Keyboard on the Attendant Console.
Visual Check
(1)
(2)
(3)
Check to see if all circuit cards are in their positions correctly.

Check that the cable connections in the PIM are correctly and completely connected, and the routing
of the cables has been done smoothly and neatly.
Check to see if the MAT is removed.
281
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOTE:
When the system is a multiple-Module configuration, attach the FRONT COVER of those other
than bottom Module in the following procedures.
(1)
Remove two screws located on the inside of the FRONT COVER, and remove the
BRACKET.
(2)
Insert the BRACKET from under the hook of the FRONT COVER and fix the BRACKET
to the FRONT COVER with screws.
(3)
Attach the FRONT COVER in an order from top-stack PIM.

FRONTCOVER
BRACKET
SCREW
282
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

The Backup CPU system has two MP cards (MP0, MP1) for active/stand by per system.
The system can execute the changeover of active/stand by MP cards according to the emergency notice
(EMA) from the MP card.
[Series 3200 R6.1 software required]
Required Equipment
Required Equipment for Backup CPU System
EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
REMARKS
SN1658 PIMMF
SN1664 PIMMH
[For EU]
PIM for Backup CPU system
For PIM0
PN-CP27-A/
PN-CP27-B
MP Card for Backup CPU

system
For MP0 and MP1
283
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM
Service Conditions
(1)
Date and time for system clock must be set by CM02.

The system clock is updated hourly from the active MP card to the stand by MP card.
(2) The MP0 and MP1 cards must have the same configuration.
The same software version must be provided to the MP0 and MP1 cards.
When one MP card mounts the ETHER card, another MP card must mount the ETHER card.
The same type of Key FD data must be loaded to the MP0 and MP1 cards.
You must prepare two Key FDs per each Key FD function and load the Key FD data to the MP0
and MP1 cards respectively.
(3) Automatic office data copy from the active MP card to the stand by MP card can be executed once
to four times a day by CM43 Y=4>00-03.
(4) The Day/Night mode change in each tenant is updated every two hours from the active MP card to
the stand by MP card.
(5) The MAT and OAI terminal that are connected to the system are available after MP cards changeover
occurs. But, the DtermIPs that are connected via Virtual IPT or router to the system are not available
for a several minutes until the APR table is updated.
(6) When MP cards changeover occurs while copying the office data from the active MP card to the
stand by MP card, the office data that has been copied is cancelled and the office data copy cannot
be executed.
(7) When MP cards changeover occurs while executing the system data backup of the stand by MP card,
the MP cards changeover will be executed after executing system data backup.
(8) When MP cards changeover occurs, the DtermIP with protected login mode requires the login
operation again.
(9) While copying the office data from the active MP card to the stand by MP card, saving/loading/
verifying of the office data and the AP program downloading cannot be executed from the MAT.
An error message is indicated on the MAT.
(10) While saving/loading/verifying of the office data and executing the AP program download from the
MAT, the office data cannot be copied from the active MP card to the stand by MP card.
(11) Peg count data and fault information can be taken over the stand by MP card from the active MP card
after MP cards changeover occurs.
284
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM
Installation Procedure
Install the Backup CPU system according to the procedure as shown below.
For switch settings on the MP card (PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B), see PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP).
Page 298
For mounting locations of the MP card, see Mounting Locations of MP Cards.
Page 286
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Set the SW3 switch on the MP0 card to 2/3 (Off-line), and mount the MP0 card into MP00 slot.
Turn the system power ON.
Connect the MAT to the MP0 card, and clear all system data by CM00.
Assign the necessary office data to the MP0 card (Date and time must be assigned by CM02).
Then execute the system data backup by CMEC Y=6>0:0.
Load the Key FD data to the MP0 card.
When setting the automatic office data copy from the active MP card to the stand by MP card at the
predetermined time, assign the data below.
The office data can be copied from the active MP card to the stand by MP card once to four times a
day. Maximum four starting time for automatic office data copy can be set to the system.
CM43 Y=4>00-03: HH MM
HH : Hour (00-23)
MM: Minutes (00-59)
If no data is set, the office data is copied from the active MP card to the stand by MP card at 2:00 a.m.
Flip the MB switch on the MP0 card to ON (UP position).
Set the SW3 switch on the MP1 card to 2/3 (Off-line).
Flip the MB switch on the MP1 card to ON (UP position), and mount the MP1 card into MP01 slot.
Flip the MB switch on the MP1 card to OFF (DOWN position).
Connect the MAT to the MP1 card, and clear all system data by CM00.
Load the Key FD data to the MP1 card.
Flip the MB switch on the MP0 and MP1 cards to ON (UP position), and set the SW3 switch on the
MP0 and MP1 cards to 0 (On-line).
Flip the MB switch on the MP0 card to OFF (DOWN position) and confirm if the RUN lamp on the
MP0 card lights.
Flip the MB switch on the MP1 card to OFF (DOWN position).
- The MP0 acts. The RUN lamp on the MP0 card flashes at 120IPM.
- The MP1 card comes into a stand by mode. The STBY lamp lights and the RUN lamp flashes in
a slow pace, on the MP1 card.
- 3 to 6 minutes later, the office data copy from the MP0 to MP1 card starts. The RUN lamp on the
MP1 card flashes intermittently.
- When the office data copy finishes, the system data backup of MP1 card is executed. The RUN
lamp is out and the SYSD lamp lights, on the MP1 card (About 1 minute).
- When the system data backup finishes, the RUN lamp on the MP1 card flashes in a slow pace
(Maximum 10 minutes later).
285
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM
Mounting Locations of MP Cards

The mounting locations of the MP cards are illustrated below.
Mount the MP0 (PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B) card into MP00 slot.
Mount the MP1 (PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B) card into MP01 slot.
NOTE:
Flip the MB switch on the MP card to ON (UP position), before mounting the MP card.
Mounting Locations of PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B Card
PFT
MP00
MP01
LT10/AP10
LT09/AP09
LT08/AP08
LT07/AP07
LT06/AP06
LT05/AP05
LT04/AP04
LT03/AP03
LT02/AP02
LT01/AP01
LT00/AP00
VM
PIM0
(For
Backup
CPU)
AC/DC
PWR
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
LTC1
LTC2
LTC3
BWB
MP0
MP1
286
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM
MP System Changeover
Automatic Changeover
By detecting the emergency notice (EMA), the system executes the changeover from the MP0 to the
MP1 or from the MP1 to the MP0 automatically.
Manual Changeover
There are two ways for manual changeover as follows.
Case1
By MB Switch Setting:
Flip the MB switch on the MP0 card to ON (UP position).
- Now changeover is executed.
When you want the stand by MP card to return to the active MP, flip the MB switch on
the stand by MP card to OFF (DOWN position), then flip the MB switch on the active
MP card to ON (UP position).
Case2
By System Data Setting:

Assign the following data for changeover.
CME0 Y=6>3600: MM DD HH mm
MM: Month (01-12)
DD : Date (01-31)
HH : Hour (00-23)
mm : Minute (00-59)
NOTE:
After setting the first data, the MAT indicates INITIAL?_.

Then input the present time. Now changeover is executed.
When there is no MP card for stand by, or the MB switch on the MP card in stand by is ON (UP
position), the MAT indicates HARDWARE ERROR.
287
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM
Office Data Copy

There are two ways for office data copy as follows.
Automatic Office Data Copy
When a Stand by MP starts:
3 to 6 minutes later after the MP card has entered into a stand by mode, all office data are copied from
the active MP card to the stand by MP card automatically.
At a Predetermined Time:
The office data is copied automatically from the active MP card to the stand by MP card at the predetermined time assigned by CM43 Y=4>00-03 once to four times a day.
NOTE:
If you set two or more starting time for automatic office data copy, set the time with fifteen minutes or more intervals.
Manual Office Data Copy

Set the data for manual office data copy as follows.
CMEC Y=5>0: 0 (start copy)
NOTE:
1 is displayed during the office data is being copied.
288
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
CHAPTER 3
LAMP INDICATIONS AND
SWITCH SETTINGS
This chapter explains the meaning of lamp indications and the switch settings
of each circuit card used in the system.
HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ..............................................

CONTROL CARD ......................................................................
APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD ........................................
LINE/TRUNK CARD ..................................................................
289
290
291
319
484
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3001.fm

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER
HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER

This chapter explains the following items about each circuit card used in this system. Explanations are given in alphabetical order of the circuit card names within each circuit card category (Control, Application
Processor, and Line/Trunk).
(1)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The locations of lamps, switches, and connectors of each circuit card are shown by a face layout.
(2)
Lamp Indications
The name, color, and functions of each indicator lamp equipped on each circuit card are described in
a table.
(3)
Switch Settings
The name, settings, and functions of each switch equipped on each circuit card are described in a
table.
Each switch setting table has a CHECK column. Make necessary entries in the CHECK column during
and/or after the system installation and maintenance, and use each table as a reference for subsequent system maintenance and operations.
290
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3001.fm

CONTROL CARD
CONTROL CARD
The table below shows the control cards to be explained in this section.
List of Control Cards
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT
ALLOWED
REFERENCE
PAGE
Page 292
PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B/
PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D (MP)
PN-CP27-A/
PN-CP27-B (MP)
Page 298
PN-CP15 (FP)
Page 303
PN-PW00
(EXTPWR)
Page 305
PZ-M606-A
(ETHER)
Page 307
PZ-PW121
(AC/DC PWR)
Page 309
PZ-PW126
(AC/DC PWR)
Page 312
PZ-PW122
(DC/DC PWR)
Page 315
PZ-PW135
(PWR)
Page 317
*MB = Make Busy
291
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
JP1
SW3
RUN
SW1
SW2
VR
JACK
SYSD
L0
CLK IN
JP0
SW4
RS1
RS0
CONN
DK
CONN: To CONN connector on PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
292
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flash (120 IPM) : On Line

Flash (slowly)
: Off Line
OFF or ON
: This card is not operating.
Lights momentarily when initializing this card.
SYSD
Red
Flashes while writing the system data for backup to the Flash Memory.
Lights while copying the system data from the Flash Memory to the
SDRAM.
L0
Green
Flashes at 240 IPM while copying the MP program from the Flash
Memory to the SDRAM.
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 240 IPM while downloading the MP program to the Flash Memory (outdated side).
PN-CP24-D card, remains lit when the MP program downloaded to the
Flash Memory (outdated side) is completed.
PN-CP24-D card, disappears when the program change of the Flash
Memory (outdated side) and the Flash Memory (upgraded side) is completed.
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 120 IPM when the MP program download
to the Flash Memory (outdated side) is interrupted/fails.
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 60 IPM while copying the program of
Flash Memory (upgraded side) to the Flash Memory (outdated side).
PN-CP24-D card, flashes specially (ON : Off = 7 : 3) when the program copy from the Flash Memory (upgraded side) to the Flash Memory (outsided side) is completed
CLK IN
Green
Remains lit while receiving clock signals to the PLO.

293
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
Switch Settings
CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Rotary SW)
NOTE 1
0-F
FUNCTION
CHECK
On Line
(Call processing is in progress)
Off Line (Call processing is stopped)

I/O port: As per CM40 Y=08

I/O port: 9600 bps (Fixed)
Debug Mode
(For collecting control signals between
MP and SIP cards)
5
NOTE 2

I/O port: 9600 bps
6
NOTE 2

I/O port: 19200 bps
7
NOTE 2

I/O port: 38400 bps
8
NOTE 2

I/O port: 57600 bps
For clearing the office data
For setting the resident system program
1, 9
A, D-F
Not used
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: Only when executing MP Program Download (Local download) using MATWorX, set the
SW3 to 5-8.
294
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Push SW)
SW2
(Piano SW)
FUNCTION
CHECK
For initializing CPU
ON
A-law (Australia)
OFF
-law (North America)
Selection of PLO0 input

(Phase Locked Oscillator)
For clock receiver office:
OFF
4
3
2
1
SW2-2 SW2-3
ON
2, 3
FUNCTION
OFF
OFF
1.5 MHz clock

[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/
PN-24PRT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZM649]
ON
OFF
192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF
ON
2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M650]
ON
ON
Not used
For clock source office:

SW2-3
SW2-2
OFF
OFF
4
ON
When using RS1 port for built-in

MODEM
OFF
When using RS1 port for RS-232C

295
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007
SWITCH NAME
SW4 (Dip SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
CHECK

3, 4
SW4-3
SW4-4
FUNCTION
OFF
OFF
1.5 MHz clock

ON
OFF
192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF
ON
2 MHz clock
ON
ON
Not used

SW4-3
SW4-4
OFF
OFF
VR (Rotary SW)
DK (Connector)
Variable Resistor for External Hold

Tone Source
(Volume [low to high] : Clockwise)
02
Ground detection
01
Ground sending
02
01
296
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007
SWITCH NAME
JP0 (Jumper pin)
Front
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
UP
For normal operation

(Battery backup ON)
DOWN
Not used
(Battery backup OFF)
RIGHT
For using external hold tone source

(When Pin Jack on the MP card is in
use)
LEFT
For using internal hold tone source

(When Merody IC on the MP card is in
use)
JP1 (Jumper pin)
Front
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
297
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
JP1
SW3
RUN
SW1
SW2
JACK
VR
JP0
SYSD
L0
CLK IN
STBY
MB
SW4
CONN
RS1
RS0
DK
CONN: To CONN connector on PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flash (120 IPM) : On Line

Flash (slowly) : Off Line
OFF or ON
Lights momentarily when initializing this card.
SYSD
Red
Flashes at 240 IPM while writing the system data for backup to the
Flash Memory. Lights while copying the system data from the Flash
L0
Green
Flashes at 240 IPM while copying the MP program from the Flash
CLK IN
Green
Remains lit while receiving clock signals to the PLO.
STBY
Red
Remains lit while this card is a stand by mode.
298
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
Switch Settings
CAUTION
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Rotary SW)
CHECK
On Line
(Call processing is in progress)

I/O port: As per CM40 Y=08

I/O port: 9600 bps (Fixed)
Debug Mode
(For collecting control signals between
MP and SIP cards)
NOTE 1
0-F
FUNCTION
5
NOTE 2

I/O port: 9600 bps
6
NOTE 2

I/O port: 19200 bps
7
NOTE 2

I/O port: 38400 bps
8
NOTE 2

I/O port: 57600 bps
For clearing the office data
For setting the resident system program
1, 9
A, D-F
Not used

NOTE 2: Only when executing MP Program Download using MATWorX, set the SW3 to 5-8.
299
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Push SW)
SW2
(Piano SW)
FUNCTION
CHECK
For initializing CPU
OFF
ON
A-law (Australia)
OFF
-law (North America)

4
3
2
1
SW2-2 SW2-3
FUNCTION
ON
2, 3
OFF
OFF
1.5 MHz clock

ON
OFF
192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF
ON
2 MHz clock
ON
ON
Not used

SW2-3
SW2-2
OFF
OFF
4
ON
When using RS1 port for built-in

MODEM
OFF
When using RS1 port for RS-232C

300
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007
SWITCH NAME
SW4 (Dip SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
CHECK

3, 4
SW4-3
SW4-4
FUNCTION
OFF
OFF
1.5 MHz clock

ON
OFF
192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF
ON
2 MHz clock
ON
ON
Not used

SW4-3
SW4-4
OFF
OFF
MB (Toggle SW)
NOTE 3
VR (Rotary SW)
UP
DOWN
For make-busy
Variable Resistor for External Hold
Tone Source
(Volume [low to high] : Clockwise)
NOTE 3: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
301
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007
SWITCH NAME
DK (Connector)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
02
Ground detection
01
Ground sending
CHECK
02
01
JP0 (Jumper pin)
Front
UP

(Battery backup ON)
DOWN
Not used
RIGHT
For using external hold tone source

(When Pin Jack on the MP card is in
use)
LEFT
For using internal hold tone source

(When Merody IC on the MP card is in
use)
JP1 (Jumper pin)
Front

302
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-CP15 (FP)
PN-CP15 (FP)
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
RUN
COLOR
Green
FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while the circuit card is operating normally.
303
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
PN-CP15 (FP)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
FUNCTION
CHECK
For setting FP No.

0-3
0
1
32
NOTE 1
Not used
For mounting this card in PIM2
4-F
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
1-3
OFF
OFF
ON
4
3
2
1
ON

Not used
Not used
OFF

circuit card.
304
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)
08
07
06
05
-48 V
-48 V
E
E
04
03
02
01
-48 V
-48 V
E
E
RUN
MB
To DESKCON
CONN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
RUN
COLOR
Green
FUNCTION
Remains lit while 48 V power is being supplied.
305
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
MB (Toggle SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
UP
ON
NOTE
DOWN
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
(48 V power off)
(48 V power on)

NOTE:
When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
306
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
FACE
REAR
LAN
CONN:
To CONN Connector
on PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B/
PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP27-A (MP)
CONN
LINK
100M
TX
RX
COL
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
LINK
Green
Remains lit when link is established.
100M
Green
ON: Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.

OFF: Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
TX
Green
Remains lit when transmitting the data.
RX
Green
Remains lit when receiving the data.
COL
Yellow
Remains lit when detecting IP data collision.
307
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Mounting PZ-M606-A Card

When mounting the ETHER card on the MP card, do the following procedure.
STEP1: Take off four screws from the rear side of ETHER support.
NOTE:
Supports and screws are attached to the ETHER card.
STEP2: Connect the CONN connector on the ETHER card and the CONN connector on the MP card.
STEP3: Secure the ETHER card to the MP card with four screws which have been taken off by STEP1.
Mounting ETHER Card on MP card
Support
CONN Connector of ETHER Card
ETHER Card
ETHER Card
MP Card
CONN Connector on MP Card
308
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

SW 301
SW 102
MJ
MN
ON
SW 101
MJ
MN
ON
CN103 (SIGNAL)
CN104
BATT
BATT
SW2
ON
CN1
OFF
SW 1
SW2
309
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
MJ
Red
Remains lit when a major trouble occurs or resident system program is

not properly loaded.
MN
Yellow
Remains lit when a minor trouble occurs or resident system program is

successfully loaded, or a station line is locked out.
ON
Green
Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied.
Switch Settings
CAUTION
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
SW2
100/120 V AC
For turning AC power and the battery

on
OFF

off
FORWARD
AC INPUT: 90 V-132 V
BACKWARD
AC INPUT: 180 V-264 V
240 V AC
SW101
(Piano key)
OFF
Not used
ON
Float charging, for sealed batteries

(Normal Setting).
OPTION: Periodic Equalize charging of
external vented batteries.
OFF
Float charging, for vented batteries

only.
ON
1
2
OFF
CHECK
ON
ON
OFF
FUNCTION
310
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW301 (Dip SW)

90 V
75 V
FUNCTION
ON
CR Voltage: 75 Vrms
OFF
CR Voltage: 90 Vrms
ON
Frequency: 20 Hz
OFF
Frequency: 25 Hz
CHECK
1
OFF
ON
2
25 Hz
SW102
20 Hz
PRESS
MOMENTARILY
To start each PIM on battery power

when AC power is not provided

311
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

SW 301
SW 102
MJ
MN
ON
SW 101
MJ
MN
ON
CN103 (SIGNAL)
CN104
BATT
BATT
ON
CN1
OFF
SW 1
312
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
MJ
Red

MN
Yellow

ON
Green
Switch Settings
CAUTION
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
SW101
(Piano key)

on
OFF

off
OFF
Not used
ON
Float charging, for sealed batteries

(Normal Setting).
OPTION: Periodic Equalize charging of
external vented batteries.
OFF
Float charging, for vented batteries

only.
ON
1
2
OFF
CHECK
ON
ON
OFF
FUNCTION
313
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW301 (Dip SW)

90 V
75 V
FUNCTION
ON
CR Voltage: 75 Vrms
OFF
CR Voltage: 90 Vrms
ON
Frequency: 20 Hz
OFF
Frequency: 25 Hz
CHECK
1
OFF
ON
2
25 Hz
SW102
20 Hz
PRESS
MOMENTARILY
To start each PIM on battery power

when AC power is not provided

314
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

CONN
ON
SW
CONN connector:
To PWR1 connector on PIM BWB
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (-48 V, E):

To PWR0C connector on PIM BWB
315
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
ON
Green
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
CAUTION
SWITCH NAME
SW
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
ON
For turning AC power on
OFF
For turning AC power off
CHECK
ON
OFF
316
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
PZ-PW135 (PWR)
PZ-PW135 (PWR)
MJ
MN
ON
MJ
MN
ON
SIG
SW1
-27 V
FG
GND
ON
DC INPUT
SW
OFF
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
MJ
Red

MN
Yellow

ON
Green
317
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
PZ-PW135 (PWR)
Switch Settings
CAUTION
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW
SW1 (Piano Key SW)
CHECK
ON
For turning DC power and the battery

on
OFF
For turning DC power and the battery

off
ON
CR Voltage: 75 Vrms
OFF
CR Voltage: 90 Vrms
ON
Frequency: 20 Hz
OFF
Frequency: 25 Hz
ON
OFF
FUNCTION
1
ON
1
2
OFF

318
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD

The table below shows the application processor cards to be explained in this section.
List of Application Processor Cards
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
REFERENCE
: ALLOWED
PAGE
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT ALLOWED
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
Page 321
PN-AP00-D (AP00)
Page 327
PN-AP00-B (DBM)
Page 333
PN-BRTA (BRT)
Page 336
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
Page 341
PN-2BRTK (BRT)
Page 346
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
Page 351
PN-24CCTA (CCT)
Page 359
PN-30CCTA (CCT)
Page 365
PN-CFTC (CFT)
Page 372
PN-CFTC-A (CFT)
Page 374
PN-DAIA-A
(DAIA)
Page 376
PN-DAIB (DAIB)
Page 381
PN-DAIC (DAIC)
Page 385
PN-DAID-A
(DAID)
Page 388
PN-DAIE (DAIE)
Page 394
PN-DAIF (DAIF)
Page 398
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB (CCH)
Page 402
*MB = Make Busy

319
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

List of Application Processor Card
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
REFERENCE
: ALLOWED
PAGE
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT ALLOWED
PN-DTA
(CCT/DTI/PRT)
Page 407
PN-DTB
(CCT/DTI/PRT)
Page 414
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
Page 421
PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
Page 427
PN-8ETIA (HUB)
PN-2ILCC (ILC)
Page 435
PN-8IPTA (SIP)
Page 440
PN-IPTB (IPT)
Page 444
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
Page 448
PN-30PRTA (PRT)
Page 456
PN-4RSTB (MFR)
Page 463
PN-4RSTC/
PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)
Page 465
PN-SC00 (CCH)
Page 467
PN-SC01 (DCH)
Page 470
PN-SC03-B/
PN-SC03-C (CSH)
Page 473
PN-SC03-B (ICH)
Page 475
PZ-M537
(EXPMEM)
PZ-M542 (CONN)
Page 480
PZ-M557 (CONN)
Page 482
Page 433
Page 477
*MB = Make Busy
320
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
CONN
SENSE
RUN
MB
JP0
SW1
L3
L2
L1
L0
RS3
RS2
RS1
JP1
RS0
SW0
SW2
CONN: To CONNR connector on PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
321
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
L0-L3
Green
Second data setting value for CMD001 > 250

0
1 (port0)-3 (port2)
L3
Indication of transmitting
status of port0
Indication of CTS signal status on

port0-2
L2
status of port1
Indication of DCD signal status on

port0-2
L1
status of port2
Indication of TXD signal status on

port0-2
L0
status of port3
Indication of RXD signal status on

port0-2
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.
F
4
AP No.
NOTE 1
SW1-4: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
For make-busy
ON
NOTE 2
DOWN

322
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 (Dip SW)

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHECK
ON
Not used
OFF
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
Sets No. 0 Port forcibly in a state which

DSR signal is always provided.
OFF
Receives DSR signal from the DCE on

No. 0 Port.
ON

OFF

No. 1 Port.
ON

OFF

No. 2 Port.
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
OFF
For AP data clearing by CMD100/

CMD101
ON
OFF

CMD101
ON
AP No. 4-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
1-3
4, 5
6
NOTE 3
7
NOTE 3
8
NOTE 3
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
FUNCTION
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
4
323
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
NOTE 3
CHECK
ON

OFF

No. 3 Port.
ON
Enables the receive clock from the DCE

(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the RXC terminal)
OFF
Uses internal clock as the receive

clock when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
ON
Enables transmit clock from the DCE

(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the TXC (2)
terminal.)
OFF
Uses internal clock as the send clock

when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
ON
Transmit the send clock from the DTE

(this card) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is transmitted from the
TXC (1) terminal)
OFF
Not transmit the send clock from the

DTE (this card) when No. 1 Port is
synchronous.
ON
OFF
When No. 1 Port is synchronous.
FUNCTION
324
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
ON
OFF
Enables receive clock from the DCE

OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
UP

(Battery backup ON)
DOWN
Not used
6
NOTE 4
JP1 (Jumper SW)
CHECK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
JP0 (Jumper SW)
FUNCTION
UP
DOWN
Not used

circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the DCE connected to the port does not provide a function to send the DSR signals, set
the switch to ON. In this case, the AP00 card cannot recognize the actual state of the DCE, so
that the call records or system messages will not be stored in the memory buffer on the AP00
card even if the cable is disconnected from the DCE.
When the switch is set to OFF, the call records or system messages will be stored when the cable
is disconnected, and will be sent when the cable is re-connected.
325
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
NOTE 4: The use of the external clock (from the distant end) or the internal clock is determined by the
following table:
CLOCK
SW2
2
External
ON
OFF
Internal
OFF
ON
326
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-AP00-D (AP00)
PN-AP00-D (AP00)
SENSE
RUN
MB
JP0
SW1
L3
L2
L1
L0
RS3
RS2
RS1
JP1
RS0
SW0
SW2
327
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-AP00-D (AP00)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
L0-L3
Green
Second data setting value for CMD001 > 250

0
1 (port0)-3 (port2)
L3
status of port0
Indication of CTS signal status on

port0-2
L2
status of port1
Indication of DCD signal status on

port0-2
L1
status of port2
Indication of TXD signal status on

port0-2
L0
status of port3
Indication of RXD signal status on

port0-2
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F

set by CM05.
F
4
AP No.
NOTE 1
SW1-4: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
For make-busy
ON
NOTE 2
DOWN

328
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-AP00-D (AP00)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 (Dip SW)

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHECK
ON
Not used
OFF
ON
OFF
Not used
ON

OFF

No. 0 Port.
ON

OFF

No. 1 Port.
ON

OFF

No. 2 Port.
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
OFF

CMD101
ON
OFF

CMD101
ON
AP No. 4-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
1-3
4, 5
6
NOTE 3
7
NOTE 3
8
NOTE 3
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
FUNCTION
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
4
329
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-AP00-D (AP00)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
NOTE 3
CHECK
ON

OFF

No. 3 Port.
ON
Enables the receive clock from the DCE

OFF

ON
Enables transmit clock from the DCE

(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the TXC (2)
terminal.)
OFF
Uses internal clock as the send clock

when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
ON
Transmit the send clock from the DTE

(this card) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is transmitted from the
TXC (1) terminal)
OFF
Not transmit the send clock from the

DTE (this card) when No. 1 Port is
synchronous.
ON
OFF
When No. 1 Port is synchronous.
FUNCTION
330
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-AP00-D (AP00)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
ON
OFF
Enables receive clock from the DCE

OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
UP

(Battery backup ON)
DOWN
Not used
6
NOTE 4
JP1 (Jumper SW)
CHECK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
JP0 (Jumper SW)
FUNCTION
UP
DOWN
Not used

circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the DCE connected to the port does not provide a function to send the DSR signals, set
the switch to ON. In this case, the AP00 card cannot recognize the actual state of the DCE, so
that the call records or system messages will not be stored in the memory buffer on the AP00
card even if the cable is disconnected from the DCE.
When the switch is set to OFF, the call records or system messages will be stored when the cable
is disconnected, and will be sent when the cable is re-connected.
331
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-AP00-D (AP00)
NOTE 4: The use of the external clock (from the distant end) or the internal clock is determined by the
following table:
CLOCK
SW2
2
External
ON
OFF
Internal
OFF
ON
332
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-AP00-B (DBM)
PN-AP00-B (DBM)
CONN
SENSE
RUN
MB
JP0
SW1
L3
L2
L1
L0
RS3
RS2
RS1
JP1
RS0
SW0
SW2
CONN: Not used

RS0-RS3: Not used
333
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-AP00-B (DBM)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
L0-L3
Green
Not used
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F

set by CM05.
F
4
SW1-4: ON
AP No.
NOTE 1
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW0 (Dip SW)

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1-8
OFF
Not used
334
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-AP00-B (DBM)
SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 4-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
OFF
Not used
UP

(Battery backup ON)
DOWN
Not used
CHECK
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
4
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
JP0 (Jumper SW)
JP1 (Jumper SW)
1-8
UP
DOWN
Not used

circuit card.
335
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-BRTA (BRT)
PN-BRTA (BRT)
SENS
RUN
MB
B1
B2
D
ALM
SW0
SW1
336
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-BRTA (BRT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
B1
Green
B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Link is connected
Link is not connected
B2
ALM
Green
Green
Red
Transmission line fault status

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
337
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-BRTA (BRT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
FUNCTION
CHECK

set by CM05.
AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW No.
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
NOTE 2
SW0 (Dip SW)
ON
1
1 2 3 4
2
NOTE 3
3
NOTE 3
DOWN
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
Source clock signal from network is

sent to the PLO of MP card according
to the switch setting of SW0-3.
OFF
Source clock signal from network is not

sent to the PLO of MP card.
ON
Clock signal is sent to the PLO0 of MP

card.
OFF
Clock signal is sent to the PLO1 of MP

card.
ON
OFF
Not used
338
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-BRTA (BRT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Dip SW)

ON
ON
1 2
FUNCTION
CHECK
For terminating the transmitting side of

channels B1 and B2 with 100 .
OFF
To remove the terminating resistor on

the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2.
ON
For terminating the receiving side of

OFF

the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2.

circuit card.
339
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-BRTA (BRT)
NOTE 3: Set the SW0-2 and SW0-3 as follows:

BRT0
BRT1
BRT2
----
BRT11
CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW
SW SW
---0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3
0-2 0-3
When one
BRT is
provided.
When more
than one BRT is
provided.
REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input.
ON ON
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
---- OFF ON
Should a clock failure occur
with BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from BRT1.
NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.
340
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
SENS
RUN
MB
B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
SW11
SW10
SW0
341
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
B21
Red
No.1 Circuit
B11
D1
Red
Green
ALM1
Red
B20
Red
B10
D0
ALM0
Red
Green
Red
B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Link is connected

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.0 Circuit
B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Link is connected

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
342
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
AP No.
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
CHECK

set by CM05.
SW11-4: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW11-4: OFF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No.
NOTE 1
FUNCTION
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW0, SW10
(Dip SW)
ON
ON

OFF

B2.
ON

OFF

B2.
1
1 2
343
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW11 (Dip SW)

1
ON
1 2 3 4
2
NOTE 3
3
NOTE 3
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON
OFF
Not used
ON

OFF

ON
Output clock signals to the PLO0 of MP

card.
OFF

card.
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31

circuit card.
344
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
NOTE 3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes.
In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO0 of MP
card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW11-2 and SW11-3 as follows.
BRT0
CONDITIONS
When one BRT

is provided.
When more
than one BRT is
provided.
BRT1
BRT2
SW SW SW SW SW SW
11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3
----
BRT23
----
SW SW
11-2 11-3
REMARKS

clock signal from No.0 circuit
of BRT0 at its PLO0 input.
with No.0 circuit, MP card
will switch to No. 1 circuit of
BRT0.
ON ON
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

conditions.
---- OFF ON Should a clock failure occur
with both No.0 and No.1 circuits of BRT0, MP card will
345
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-2BRTK (BRT)
PN-2BRTK (BRT)
SENSE
RUN
MB
B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
SW10
SW11
SW0
346
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-2BRTK (BRT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
B21
Red
No.1 Circuit
B11
D1
Red
Green
ALM1
Red
B20
Red
B10
D0
ALM0
Red
Green
Red
B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Link is connected

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.0 Circuit
B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Link is connected

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
347
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-2BRTK (BRT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
AP No.
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
CHECK

set by CM05.
SW11-4: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW11-4: OFF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No.
NOTE 1
FUNCTION
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW0, SW10
(Dip SW)
ON
ON

OFF

B2.
ON

OFF

B2.
1
1 2
348
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-2BRTK (BRT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW11 (Dip SW)

1
ON
1 2 3 4
2
NOTE 3
3
NOTE 3
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON
OFF
Not used
ON

OFF

ON

card.
OFF

card.
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31

circuit card.
349
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-2BRTK (BRT)
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW11-2 and SW11-3 as follows.
BRT0
CONDITIONS
When one BRT

is provided.
When more
than one BRT is
provided.
BRT1
BRT2
SW SW SW SW SW SW
11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3
----
BRT23
----
SW SW
11-2 11-3
REMARKS

clock signal from No.0 circuit
of BRT0 at its PLO0 input.
with No.0 circuit, MP card
will switch to No. 1 circuit of
BRT0.
ON ON
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

conditions.
---- OFF ON Should a clock failure occur
with both No.0 and No.1 circuits of BRT0, MP card will
350
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW4
SW0
SW1
SW2
SW3
B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
B23
B13
D3
ALM3
B22
B12
D2
ALM2
CN2
351
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
B23
Red
No.3 Circuit
B13
D3
Red
Green
ALM3
Red
B22
Red
B12
D2
ALM2
Red
Green
Red
B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Link is connected

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.2 Circuit
B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Link is connected

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
352
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
LAMP
NAME
B21
B11
D1
COLOR
Red
Green
Red
B20
Red
D0
ALM0
No.1 Circuit
Red
ALM1
B10
FUNCTION
Red
Green
Red
B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Link is connected

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.0 Circuit
B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Link is connected

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
353
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
AP No.
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
CHECK

set by CM05.
SW4-8: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW4-8: OFF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No.
NOTE 1
FUNCTION
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
NOTE 2
DOWN

354
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW4 (Piano SW)
Output clock signals to PLO0/PLO1 of MP card. NOTE 3
OFF
FUNCTION
SW No.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ON
CHECK
Circuit No.
No.0
No.1
No.2
No.3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
PLO0
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
PLO0
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
PLO0
PLO1
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
PLO0
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
PLO0
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
PLO0
PLO1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PLO0
PLO1
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
PLO0
PLO1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
PLO0
PLO1
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
PLO0
PLO1
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Not allowed
ON
Output clock signals according to the

switch setting of SW4-1 to SW4-4.
OFF
Output clock signals to the reverse PLO

route of the switch setting of SW4-1 to
SW4-4.
OFF
Not used (Always set to OFF)
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
5
NOTE 3
355
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 (Dip SW)

ON
CHECK
ON

channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.0
Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.0 Circuit)
ON

Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.0 Circuit)
ON

Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.1 Circuit)
ON

Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.1 Circuit)
1 2
SW1 (Dip SW)

ON
FUNCTION
1 2
356
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
CHECK
ON

Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.2 Circuit)
ON

Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.2 Circuit)
ON

Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.3 Circuit)
ON

Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.3 Circuit)
1 2
SW3 (Dip SW)

ON
FUNCTION
1 2

357
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

circuit card.
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW4-1 to SW4-5 as follows.
CONDITIONS
When one BRT is

provided.
When more than

one BRT is provided.
SWITCH
BRT0
BRT1
BRT2
SW4-1
ON
SW4-2
OFF
SW4-3
OFF
SW4-4
OFF
SW4-5
ON
SW4-1
----
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
SW4-2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW4-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW4-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW4-5
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
----
BRT23
OFF
358
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24CCTA (CCT)
PN-24CCTA (CCT)
SENSE
RUN
MAS
MB
SW1
JP1
SW0
AISS
SW2
JPR0
LC
LPB
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
AIS
BL
JPS
JRR1
359
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24CCTA (CCT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LC
Green
Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel data links connected.
LPB
Green
Remains lit when a loopback test is in progress.
CRC
Red
Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)

errors.
PCM
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
FRM
Red
Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.
AIS
Red
Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received.

The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.
BL
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)
: More than 10 channels are busy

: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 through 10 channels are busy
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
NOTE 1
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F

set by CM05.
F
4
FUNCTION
AP No.
SW1-4: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW1-4: OFF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
360
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24CCTA (CCT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
ON
3
NOTE 7
4
NOTE 7
5
NOTE 7
6
NOTE 7
ON

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
OFF

ON

OFF

ON
Remote loopback
OFF
ON
Local loopback (AIS send)
OFF
ON
Set equalizer according to the cable

length between the PBX and the CSU.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
7
NOTE 7
OFF
OFF
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
CABLE LENGTH
0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent
Not used
361
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24CCTA (CCT)
SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
CHECK
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
ON
Common channel signaling data

transmission speed (For Digital Interface)
SW2 (Dip SW)

1
ON
FUNCTION
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
TRANSMISSION
SPEED
SW
2-1
48 Kbps NOTE 6
48 Kbps NOTE 6
OFF
SW
2-2
SW
2-3
SW
2-4
SW
2-5
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
56 Kbps
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
64 Kbps
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

362
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24CCTA (CCT)
SWITCH NAME
JPR0 (Jumper pin)
JPR1 (Jumper pin)
JPS (Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
UP
Neutral grounding on the receiving line

is provided.
DOWN

is not provided.
RIGHT
Line impedance: 100
LEFT
Line impedance: 110
UP
Neutral grounding on the transmitting

line is provided.
DOWN

line is not provided.
DOWN
Always set to DOWN
MAS (Jumper pin)
AISS (Jumper pin)
UP
AIS signal is sent out when make-busy

or power on.
DOWN
AIS signal is not sent out when makebusy or power on.
JP1 (Jumper pin)

LEFT
Always set to LEFT

363
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
AUGUST/15/2006
PN-24CCTA (CCT)
circuit card.
NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:
CCT0
CONDITIONS
When one CCT

is provided.
When more than

one CCT is provided.
CCT1
CCT2
SW SW SW SW SW SW
0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2
ON OFF
CCT7
SW SW
0-1 0-2
REMARKS
clock signal from CCT0
at its PLO0 input.

at its PLO0 input, under
normal conditions.
Should a clock failure
OFF OFF
occurs with CCT0, MP
card will automatically
which gets clock from
CCT1.
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW0-1 and SW0-2 on all the CCT cards mounted
in PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 5: Mount the CCT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 6: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
SW2-3: ON
SW2-3: OFF
48 Kbps
1
48 Kbps
1
Data
1
Data
NOTE 7: This card must be reset after the SW0-3 to SW0-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.
364
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30CCTA (CCT)
PN-30CCTA (CCT)
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW
JP1
JPS
SW1
LC
LPB
PCM
FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
BL
JPR
JP
365
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30CCTA (CCT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM when this card is normally operating.
LC
Green
LPB
Green
PCM
Red
FRM
Red
MFRM
Red
Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time

slot 16.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant office.
MRMT
Red
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office.
AIS
Red
Remains lit when indicating that the pattern of consecutive 1 is being

received. The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.
BL
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM) : 2 to 10 channels are busy
366
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30CCTA (CCT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
AP No.
FUNCTION
CHECK

set by CM05.
SW-8: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW-8: OFF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No.
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
NOTE 2
DOWN

367
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30CCTA (CCT)
SWITCH
NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
ON
3
4
7
8
CHECK
ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON
Remote loopback
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Transmission line cable:

Coaxial cable (75 )
OFF

Twisted-pair cable (120 )
ON
Loopback test
OFF
OFF
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
FUNCTION
368
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30CCTA (CCT)
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1(Dip SW)
1
ON
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
FUNCTION
CHECK

TRANSMISSION
SPEED
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
SW
1-3
SW
1-4
SW
1-5
48 Kbps NOTE 5
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
48 Kbps NOTE 5
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
56 Kbps
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
64 Kbps
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

369
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30CCTA (CCT)
SWITCH
NAME
JPS
(Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT
JPR
(Jumper pin)
JP
(Jumper pin)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)
TA is grounded on the transmission line
(For coaxial cable)
DOWN
RA is grounded on the transmission line

(For coaxial cable)
RIGHT
Line impedance: 75
(For coaxial cable)
LEFT
Line impedance: 120

JP1 (Jumper pin)

DOWN
Always set to DOWN

circuit card.
370
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30CCTA (CCT)
NOTE 3: Set SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:

CCT0
CONDITIONS
When one CCT is

provided.
When more than

one CCT is
provided.
CCT1
CCT2
SW SW SW SW SW SW
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
ON OFF
CCT7
REMARKS
SW SW
-1 -2

at its PLO0 input.

at its PLO0 input, under
normal conditions.
OFF OFF
occurs with CCT0, MP
CCT1.
NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the CCT cards mounted in
PIM0 to OFF.
SW1-3: ON
SW1-3: OFF
48 Kbps
1
48 Kbps
1
Data
1
Data
NOTE 6: Mount the CCT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
371
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-CFTC (CFT)
PN-CFTC (CFT)
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
RUN1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Remains lit while this card is operating normally.
RUN1
Red
Remains lit while the DSP on this card is operating normally.
372
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-CFTC (CFT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
AP No.
FUNCTION
CHECK

set by CM05.
SW1-4: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW1-4: OFF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No.
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1 (Dip SW)
ON
1-3
OFF
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
1 2 3 4

circuit card.
373
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-CFTC-A (CFT)
PN-CFTC-A (CFT)
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
DOPE0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Frashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
DOPE0
Green
Remains lit while the DSP on this card is operating normally.
374
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-CFTC-A (CFT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
AP No.
FUNCTION
CHECK

set by CM05.
SW1-4: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW1-4: OFF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No.
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
1-3
OFF
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
OFF
4
3
2
1
4
ON

circuit card.
375
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)
PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL
SW1
SW2
BUS
SW3
PCM1
PCM0
JPS
JPR
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LINK
Green
Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is
normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RED
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment

signal loss.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP
Not used
PWR
Not used
BL
Red
Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).

Flashes while FP data downloading.
376
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
CHECK
FP (Firmware Processor) Number setting for the DAIA

card.
By this setting, the system regards the DAIA card and
the opposite DAIB card as one Firmware Processor.
0
1
2
NOTE 1
FUNCTION
SW1-4: ON
0-F
FP No. 16
FP No. 01
FP No. 17
FP No. 02
FP No. 18
FP No. 03
FP No. 19
4F
MB (Toggle SW)
SW1-4: OFF
UP
Not used
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
NOTE 3
2
NOTE 3
1
ON
3
4
ON
For supplying 1.5 MHz clock to

PLO0
OFF
No clock supply to PLO0
ON

PLO1
OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
ON
FP No.01-03
OFF
FP No.16-19
377
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 48 Kbps
OFF
ON
DTI frame configuration: 12-Multi

Frame
OFF

Frame
ON
Line code: AMI with ZCS
OFF
Line code: B8ZS
ON
Setting of control signal time slot
CHECK
ON
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FUNCTION
SWITCH NUMBER
4
OFF
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
8
OFF
4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
6
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TIME SLOT
NUMBER
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS23
NOTE 4: The time slot number 0, 20,

21, and 22 (TS0/20/21/22)
cannot be used for control
signal.
NOTE 5: This setting must be identical
with the opposite DAIB card.
378
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Dip SW)

ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1
OFF
ON
2
OFF
ON
3
OFF
4
JPS (Jumper pin)
SW
3-1
SW
3-2
SW
3-3
CABLE
LENGTH
ON
ON
ON
0 - 40 m
(0-131.2 ft.)
ON
ON
OFF
40 - 80 m
(131.2-262.5 ft.)
ON
OFF
ON
80 - 120 m
(262.5-394 ft.)
ON
OFF
OFF
120 - 160 m
(394-525 ft.)
OFF
ON
ON
160 - 200 m
(525-656 ft.)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Signal is not sent
FP No.16
OFF
FP No.01-03, 17-19
RIGHT
CHECK
Set the equalizer according to the cable

length between the system and the
CSU.
ON
LEFT
JPR (Jumper pin)
FUNCTION
For mounting this card on PIM1 - PIM7

For mounting this card on PIM0
RIGHT

is provided.
LEFT

is not provided.

379
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

circuit card.
NOTE 3: When source clock signal is supplied via the line between the Main Site and the Remote Site, set
the SW1-1 and SW1-2 as the following table. In this case, DAIA cards (DAIA0, DAIA1) must be
mounted in PIM0.
DAIA0
DAIA1
DAIA5
CONDITIONS
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
REMARKS
One DAIA card is

provided.
ON
OFF
The clock signal is sent

to PLO0 of MP card via
supply route 0
(DAIA0).
Two or three
DAIA cards are
provided.
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
380
OFF The clock signal supply

route is automatically
changed to the route 1
(DAIA1), if a transmission line failure occurs
on the supply route 0.
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIB (DAIB)
PN-DAIB (DAIB)
SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
LOOP
BL
SW1
SW2
BUS
SW3
JPS
JPR
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LINK
Green
normally connected.
RED
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment

signal loss.
RMT
Red
LOOP
Not used
BL
Red

381
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIB (DAIB)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
FUNCTION
CHECK
Always set to 0
0-F
MB (Toggle SW)
1-F
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 1
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF

382
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIB (DAIB)
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
OFF
ON

Frame
OFF

Frame
ON
OFF
Line code: B8ZS
ON
CHECK
ON
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FUNCTION
SWITCH NUMBER
4
OFF
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
8
OFF
4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
6
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TIME SLOT
NUMBER
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS23
NOTE 2: The time slot number 0, 20,

21, and 22 (TS0/20/21/22)
cannot be used for control
signal.
with the opposite DAIA card.
383
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIB (DAIB)
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Dip SW)

ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1
OFF
ON
2
FUNCTION
CSU.
SW
3-1
SW
3-2
SW
3-3
ON
ON
ON
0 - 40 m
(0-131.2 ft.)
ON
ON
OFF
40 - 80 m
(131.2-262.5 ft.)
ON
OFF
ON
80 - 120 m
(262.5-394 ft.)
ON
OFF
OFF
120 - 160 m
(394-525 ft.)
OFF
ON
ON
160 - 200 m
(525-656 ft.)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Signal is not sent
OFF
ON
3
OFF
4
JPS (Jumper pin)
JPR (Jumper pin)
CHECK
CABLE
LENGTH
OFF
Always set to OFF
UP

line is provided.
DOWN

UP

is provided.
DOWN

is not provided.

circuit card.
384
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIC (DAIC)
PN-DAIC (DAIC)
RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL
SW2
SW1
TBUS
SW3
RBUS
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LINK
Green
Remains lit when the following connection are normal.

Control channel link between the DAIA card and DAIB card.
Connection between the opposite DAIC card.
RED
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment signal loss.
RMT
Red
LOOP
Not used
PWR
Not used
BL
Not used
385
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIC (DAIC)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
4
3
2
1
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Not used
ON

Frame
OFF

Frame
ON
OFF
Line code: B8ZS
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON
SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
386
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIC (DAIC)
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Dip SW)

ON
ON
1
1 2 3 4
OFF
ON
2
OFF
ON
3
OFF
FUNCTION
CHECK

CSU.
SW
3-1
SW
3-2
SW
3-3
CABLE
LENGTH
ON
ON
ON
0 - 40 m
(0-131.2 ft.)
ON
ON
OFF
40 - 80 m
(131.2-262.5 ft.)
ON
OFF
ON
80 - 120 m
(262.5-394 ft.)
ON
OFF
OFF
120 - 160 m
(394-525 ft.)
OFF
ON
ON
160 - 200 m
(525-656 ft.)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Signal is not sent
ON
When mounting this card on Remote

Site.
OFF
When mounting this card on Main Site.

NOTE:
When the power is on, flip MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
387
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAID-A (DAID)
PN-DAID-A (DAID)
SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL
SW1
BUS
SW2
SW3
PCM1
PCM0
SRT
E1Z
JPR
JP
JPS
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LINK
Green
Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is normally connected.
RMT
Red
LOOP
Not used
PWR
Red
BL
Red

388
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAID-A (DAID)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
CHECK
FP (Firmware Processor) Number setting for the DAID

card.
By this setting, the system regards the DAID card and
the opposite DAIE card as one Firmware Processor.
0
1
2
3
NOTE 1
FUNCTION
SW1-4: ON
0-F
MB (Toggle SW)
SW1-4: OFF
FP No. 16
FP No. 01
FP No. 17
FP No. 02
FP No. 18
FP No. 03
FP No. 19
4-F
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
1
NOTE 3
ON

PLO0
OFF
ON

PLO1
OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
ON
FP No.01-03
OFF
FP No.16-19
OFF
4
3
2
1
2
NOTE 3
ON
3
4
389
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAID-A (DAID)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
CHECK
ON
OFF
ON
CRC Synchronization Detection Timer

is provided.
OFF

is not provided.
ON
CRC4 Check is provided.
OFF
CRC4 Check is not provided.
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FUNCTION
3
390
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAID-A (DAID)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON
4
ON
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
OFF
8
CHECK

SWITCH NUMBER
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FUNCTION
4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
6
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TIME SLOT
NUMBER
TS 1
TS 2
TS 3
TS 4
TS 5
TS 6
TS 7
TS 8
TS 9
TS 10
TS 11
TS 12
TS 13
TS 14
TS 15
TS 16
TS 17
TS 18
TS 19
TS 20
TS 21
TS 22
TS 23
TS 24
TS 25
TS 26
TS 27
TS 29
TS 30
TS 31
NOTE 4: The time slot number 0 and

28 (TS0/28) cannot be used
for control signal.
with the opposite DAIE card.
391
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAID-A (DAID)
SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
ON
Always set to ON
ON
Always set to ON
ON
Always set to ON
ON
FP No.16
OFF
FP No.01-03, 17-19
4
JPS (Jumper pin)
RIGHT
LEFT
JPR (Jumper pin)
RIGHT
LEFT
E1Z (Jumper pin)
RIGHT
LEFT
SRT (Jumper pin)
RIGHT
LEFT
JP (Jumper pin)
FUNCTION
UP
DOWN
CHECK
Balanced transmission: 120

TA is grounded on the transmission
line: 75 (For coaxial cable)
RA is grounded on the transmission
Line impedance:
120 (For twisted-pair cable)
Line impedance:
75 (For coaxial cable)
For mounting this card on PIM0
For mounting this card on PIM1-PIM7
Line impedance:
Line impedance:

392
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAID-A (DAID)

circuit card.
NOTE 3: When source clock signal is supplied via the line between the Main Site and the Remote Site, set
the SW1-1 and SW1-2 as the following table. In this case, DAID cards (DAID0, DAID1) must
be mounted in PIM0.
DAID0
DAID1
DAID5
CONDITIONS
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
REMARKS
One DAID card is

provided.
ON
OFF
The clock signal is sent

to PLO0 of MP card via
supply route 0
(DAID0).
Two or three
DAID cards are
provided.
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
393
OFF The clock signal supply

route is automatically
changed to the route 1
(DAID1), if a transmission line failure occurs
on the supply route 0.
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIE (DAIE)
PN-DAIE (DAIE)
SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RMT
LOOP
BL
SW1
BUS
SW2
SW3
JP
E1Z
JPR
JPS
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LINK
Green
normally connected.
RMT
Red
LOOP
Not used
BL
Red

Remains lit while FP data downloading.
394
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIE (DAIE)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
FUNCTION
CHECK
Always set to 0
0-F
MB (Toggle SW)
1-F
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 1
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
ON
OFF
ON

is provided.
OFF

is not provided.
ON
OFF
SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
395
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIE (DAIE)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON
4
ON
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
OFF
8
CHECK

SWITCH NUMBER
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FUNCTION
4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
6
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TIME SLOT
NUMBER
TS 1
TS 2
TS 3
TS 4
TS 5
TS 6
TS 7
TS 8
TS 9
TS 10
TS 11
TS 12
TS 13
TS 14
TS 15
TS 16
TS 17
TS 18
TS 19
TS 20
TS 21
TS 22
TS 23
TS 24
TS 25
TS 26
TS 27
TS 29
TS 30
TS 31
NOTE 2: The time slot number 0 and

28 (TS0/28) cannot be used
for control signal.
with the opposite DAID card.
396
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIE (DAIE)
SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
JPS (Jumper pin)
JPR (Jumper pin)
E1Z (Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
ON
Always set to ON
ON
Always set to ON
ON
Always set to ON
OFF
Always set to OFF
CHECK
RIGHT
Balanced transmission: 120 (For

twisted-pair cable)
LEFT

RIGHT

LEFT
Balanced transmission: 120 (For

twisted-pair cable)
RIGHT
Line impedance: 75 (For coaxial

cable)
LEFT
SRT (Jumper pin)
FUNCTION
RIGHT
LEFT
Line impedance:
Line impedance:
Line impedance:

circuit card.
397
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIF (DAIF)
PN-DAIF (DAIF)
RUN
MB
LINK
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL
SW2
SW1
TBUS
SW3
JPS
RBUS
JP
JPR
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LINK
Green
Remains lit when the following connection are normal.

Control channel link between the DAID card and DAIE card.
Connection between the opposite DAIF card.
RMT
Red
LOOP
Not used
PWR
Red

(Only on the DAIF card mounted on the Main Site.)
BL
Not used
398
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIF (DAIF)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
Always set to OFF
ON
Line impedance: 75
(For coaxial cable)
OFF
Line impedance: 120

OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
399
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIF (DAIF)
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON
OFF
ON

is provided.
OFF

is not provided.
ON
OFF
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
400
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DAIF (DAIF)
SWITCH
NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON
Always set to ON
ON
Always set to ON
ON
Always set to ON
ON
When mounting this card on Remote

Site.
OFF
When mounting this card on Main Site.
1 2 3 4
4
JPS (Jumper pin)
RIGHT
LEFT
JPR (Jumper pin)
RIGHT
LEFT
JP (Jumper pin)
UP
DOWN

Line impedance:
Line impedance:

NOTE:
circuit card.
401
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)
SENSE
RUN
SW3
MB
SW1
SW2
JP3
JP2
JPRI
JP1
JPR
LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL
JPT
402
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LC
Green
LPB
Green
Remains lit when loopback test is in progress.
PCM
Not used
MFRM
Not used
FRM
Not used
MRMT
Not used
RMT
Not used
CRC
Not used
AIS
Not used
BL
Not used
403
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F

set by CM05.
F
4
FUNCTION
AP No.
NOTE 1
SW1-4: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
ON
Local loopback
OFF
OFF
Not used
4
ON
SW2
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1-3, 5-8
ON
404
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)
SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
OFF
Always set to OFF
ON
Always set to ON
OFF
OFF
ON
5
OFF
CHECK

ON
6
OFF
TRANSMISSION
SPEED
SW
3-5
SW
3-6
48 Kbps (1) NOTE 3
OFF
ON
48 Kbps (2) NOTE 3
OFF
OFF
56 Kbps
ON
OFF
64 Kbps
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
JP1 (Jumper pin)

RIGHT
Not used
LEFT
Not used
RIGHT
Not used
JP2 (Jumper pin)
JP3 (Jumper pin)
405
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
JPRI (Jumper pin)

LEFT
Not used
LEFT
Not used
LEFT
Not used
JPR (Jumper pin)
JPT (Jumper pin)

circuit card.
SW3-6: ON
SW3-6: OFF
48 Kbps (1)
1
48 Kbps (2)
1
Data
1
Data
406
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)
SENSE
SW3
RUN
MB
SW1
SW2
JP3
JPRI
JP2
JPR
JPT
JP1
407
LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LC
Green
Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel (CCT)/D channel (DTI/PRT) data links connected.
LPB
Green
Remains lit when a loopback is in progress.
PCM
Red
MFRM
Red

slot 16 (Only for E1).
FRM
Red
MRMT
Red
office (Only for E1).
RMT
Red
distant office.
CRC
Red
Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors

(Only for T1).
AIS
Red
BL
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

408
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F

set by CM05.
F
4
FUNCTION
AP No.
NOTE 1
NOTE 8
SW1-4: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
4
3
2
1
[North America only]
ON
NOTE 3
ON
DS-1
(T1 with CSU function)
OFF
DSX-1
(T1 without CSU function)
[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
4
NOTE 8
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
409
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
SWITCH NAME
SW2
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
ON
3
NOTE 6
4
NOTE 6
FUNCTION
ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON
Remote loopback
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
5
NOTE 6
OFF

length between the PBX and the C.O.
or CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
6
NOTE 6
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
7
NOTE 6
OFF
OFF
CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 )
1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)

599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent
For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan

(SW1-3 OFF)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7
CHECK
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent
Not used
410
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
SWITCH NAME
SW3
(Dip SW)
OFF
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON
T1 mode
OFF
E1 mode
ON
PRT/CCT mode
OFF
DTI mode
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON
Common channel signaling data transmission speed (For Digital Interface)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
TRANSMISSION
SPEED
SW
3-5
SW
3-6
48 Kbps (1) NOTE 7
OFF
ON
48 Kbps (2) NOTE 7
OFF
OFF
56 Kbps
ON
OFF
64 Kbps
ON
ON
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
411
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
AUGUST/15/2006
SWITCH NAME
JP1 (Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT
JP2 (Jumper pin)
RIGHT
FUNCTION
CHECK
Set the line impedance.

JP1
JP2
LINE IMPEDANCE
LEFT
RIGHT
100 (for T1)
LEFT
LEFT
110 (for T1)
RIGHT
RIGHT
120 (for E1)
RIGHT
LEFT
75 (for E1)
LEFT
JP3 (Jumper pin)
RIGHT
(For twisted-paire cable) (for T1/E1)
LEFT
Unbalanced transmission
(For coaxial cable) (for E1)
LEFT
Not used
JPRI (Jumper pin)
JPR (Jumper pin)
JPT (Jumper pin)
RIGHT

is provided.
LEFT

is not provided.
RIGHT

line is provided.
LEFT


circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW2-1 and SW2-2 on all the CCT/DTI/PRT cards
mounted in PIM0 to OFF.
412
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
CONDITIONS
When one CCT/DTI/

PRT is provided.
When more than one

CCT/DTI/PRT is
provided.
CCT/DTI/PRT0
CCT/DTI/PRT1
CCT/DTI/PRT2
SW
2-1
SW
2-1
SW
2-1
SW
2-2
ON
OFF
ON
SW
2-2
OFF OFF
ON
SW
2-2
CCT/DTI/PRT7
SW
2-1
SW
2-2
REMARKS
MP card will receive the clock
signal from CCT/DTI/PRT0 at
its PLO0 input.

its PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure occurs
with CCT/DTI/PRT0, MP card
will automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which gets clock
from CCT/DTI/PRT1.
OFF OFF
NOTE 5: Mount the CCT/DTI/PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
then DOWN.
SW3-6: ON
SW3-6: OFF
48 Kbps (1)
1
48 Kbps (2)
1
Data
1
Data
NOTE 8: When using the AP Number 64 to 93 (for AP Number extension) in accommodating the PRT
card on Remote site, be sure to set the SENSE switch and SW1-4 switch of all the PRT cards to
be accommodated to AP Number 31. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each PRT card. If a different site is used to accommodate the PRT card, be sure to
set switches similarly.
413
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)
SENSE
SW3
RUN
MB
SW1
SW2
JP3
JPRI
JP2
JPR
JPT
JP1
414
LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LC
Green
Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel (CCT)/D channel (DTI/PRT) data links connected.
LPB
Green
PCM
Red
MFRM
Red

slot 16 (Only for E1).
FRM
Red
MRMT
Red
office (Only for E1).
RMT
Red
distant office.
CRC
Red
Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors

(Only for T1).
AIS
Red
BL
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

415
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F

set by CM05.
F
4
FUNCTION
AP No.
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
SW1-4: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 3
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
4
3
2
1
ON
NOTE 4
ON
DS-1
OFF
DSX-1
[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
4
NOTE 2
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
416
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
SWITCH NAME
SW2
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 4
NOTE 5
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
NOTE 4
NOTE 5
ON
3
NOTE 7
4
NOTE 7
FUNCTION
ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON
Remote loopback
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
5
NOTE 7
OFF

or CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
6
NOTE 7
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
7
NOTE 7
OFF
OFF
1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)

599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent

(SW1-3 OFF)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7
CHECK
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent
Not used
417
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
SWITCH NAME
SW3
(Dip SW)
OFF
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON
T1 mode
OFF
E1 mode
ON
PRT/CCT mode
OFF
DTI mode
ON
A-law/u-law conversion (For Taiwan)

NOTE 8,NOTE 9
OFF
OFF
Not used
ON
Common channel signaling data transmission speed (For Digital Interface)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5
OFF
ON
6
TRANSMISSION
SPEED
SW
3-5
SW
3-6
48 Kbps (1) NOTE 10
OFF
ON
48 Kbps (2) NOTE 10
OFF
OFF
56 Kbps
ON
OFF
64 Kbps
ON
ON
OFF
7
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
418
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
SWITCH NAME
JP1 (Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT
JP2 (Jumper pin)
RIGHT
FUNCTION
CHECK
Set the line impedance.

JP1
JP2
LINE IMPEDANCE
LEFT
RIGHT
100 (for T1)
LEFT
LEFT
110 (for T1)
RIGHT
RIGHT
120 (for E1)
RIGHT
LEFT
75 (for E1)
LEFT
JP3 (Jumper pin)
RIGHT
(For twisted-paire cable) (for T1/E1)
LEFT
Unbalanced transmission
(For coaxial cable) (for E1)
LEFT
Not used
JPRI (Jumper pin)
JPR (Jumper pin)
JPT (Jumper pin)
RIGHT

is provided.
LEFT

is not provided.
RIGHT

line is provided.
LEFT


circuit card.
419
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW2-1 and SW2-2 on all the CCT/DTI/PRT cards
mounted in PIM0 to OFF.
CONDITIONS
When one CCT/DTI/

PRT is provided.
When more than one

CCT/DTI/PRT is
provided.
CCT/DTI/PRT0
CCT/DTI/PRT1
CCT/DTI/PRT2
SW
2-1
SW
2-1
SW
2-1
ON
ON
SW
2-2
OFF
SW
2-2
OFF OFF
ON
SW
2-2
CCT/DTI/PRT7
SW
2-1
SW
2-2
REMARKS
its PLO0 input.

its PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure occurs
with CCT/DTI/PRT0, MP card
will automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which gets clock
from CCT/DTI/PRT1.
OFF OFF
NOTE 6: Mount the CCT/DTI/PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
then DOWN.
NOTE 8: This switch setting is required when providing A-law/u-law conversion for CCT/DTI/PRT in
Taiwan. And for PRT, A-law/u-law setting by CMAAY=17 is required in addition to the switch
setting (Setting SW3-3 to ON).
NOTE 9: To provide A-law/u-law conversion for CCT/DTI/PRT, the following firmware program and
MP program are required.
Firmware program
MP program
CCT
SC-3729 IPS CCHDA PROG-B1 or later
No limitation
DTI
SC-3712 IPS PRTDA PROG-B1 or later
No limitation
PRT (PRI)
SC-3712 IPS PRTDA PROG-B1 or later
Series 3900 or later
PRT (Q-SIG) SC-3728 IPS PRTDB PROG-B1 or later
No limitaion
NOTE 10:The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
SW3-6: OFF
SW3-6: ON
48 Kbps (1)
1
48 Kbps (2)
1
Data
1
Data
420
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
SENSE
RUN
MAS
MB
SW1
JP1
SW0
AISS
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
AIS
BL
JPR0
JPS
JRR1
421
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
CRC
Red
Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors.
PCM
Red
FRM
Red
RMT
Red
distant office.
AIS
Red
Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received. The distant

office transmits this signal for a loopback test.
BL
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
Not used
4-F

set by CM05.
AP No.
NOTE 1
SW1-4: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
CHECK
0-3
F
4
FUNCTION
UP
For make-busy
ON
NOTE 2
DOWN

422
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
SWITCH NAME
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
ON
3
NOTE 6
4
NOTE 6
FUNCTION
ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON
Remote loopback
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
5
NOTE 6
OFF

or CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
6
NOTE 6
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
7
NOTE 6
OFF
OFF
1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)

599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent

(SW1-3 OFF)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7
CHECK
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent
Not used
423
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
4
3
2
1
CHECK
ON
NOTE 4
ON
DS-1
OFF
DSX-1
[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
UP

is provided.
DOWN

is not provided.
RIGHT
Line impedance: 100
LEFT
Line impedance: 110
4
JPR0 (Jumper pin)
JPR1 (Jumper pin)
JPS (Jumper pin)
UP

line is provided.
DOWN

424
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
MAS (Jumper pin)

DOWN
AISS (Jumper pin)
Always set to DOWN
UP

or power on.
DOWN
JP1 (Jumper pin)

LEFT
Always set to LEFT

425
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
AUGUST/15/2006
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

circuit card.
DTI0
CONDITIONS
When one DTI is

provided.
When more than one

DTI is provided.
SW
0-1
ON
ON
SW
0-2
OFF
DTI1
SW
0-1
OFF OFF
DTI2
SW
0-2
ON
SW
0-1
SW
0-2
OFF OFF
DTI7
SW
0-1
SW
0-2
REMARKS
signal from DTI0 at its PLO0
input.

signal from DTI0 at its PLO0
input, under normal conditions.
Should a clock failure occurs
OFF OFF
with DTI0, MP card will automatically switch to the PLO1
input which gets clock from
DTI1.
NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW0-1 and SW0-2 on all the DTI cards mounted
in PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 5: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
then DOWN.
426
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW
PCM
FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
BL
JP1
JPS
JPR
JP
427
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
PCM
Red
FRM
Red
MFRM
Red

slot 16.
RMT
Red
MRMT
Red
office.
AIS
Red

BL
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: 2 to 10 channels are busy
428
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
CHECK

set by CM05.
AP No.
FUNCTION
SW-8: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW-8: OFF
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
SW No.
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
NOTE 2
DOWN

429
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
SWITCH
NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
ON
3
4
CHECK
ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON
Remote loopback
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Coaxial cable (75 )
OFF

OFF
OFF
FUNCTION
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
430
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
SWITCH
NAME
JPS
(Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT
JPR
(Jumper pin)
JP
(Jumper pin)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
(For coaxial cable)
DOWN

(For coaxial cable)
RIGHT
Line impedance: 75
(For coaxial cable)
LEFT
Line impedance: 120

JP1
(Jumper pin)
DOWN
Always set to DOWN

circuit card.
431
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
NOTE 3: Set the SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:

DTI0
CONDITIONS
When one DTI is

provided.
When more than

one DTI is
provided.
DTI1
DTI2
SW SW SW SW SW SW
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
ON OFF
DTI7
SW SW
-1 -2
REMARKS
clock signal from DTI0 at
its PLO0 input.

clock signal from DTI0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure
occurs with DTI0, MP card
will automatically switch to
the PLO1 input which gets
from DTI1.
NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the DTI cards mounted in
PIM0 to OFF.
432
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-8ETIA (HUB)
PN-8ETIA (HUB)
PN-8ETIA
PZ-M675
D4
S2
10/100
LINK/ACT
10/100
LINK/ACT
10/100
LINK/ACT
10 /100
LINK/ACT
J12
LAN 7/8
LAN 5/6
To LAN
LAN 3/4
LAN 1/2
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
D4
Green
ON
OFF
: Operating power is ON.

: Operating power is OFF.
LINK/ACT
Green
Lights : LAN link pulse is detected.

Flashes : LAN data is transferred and received.
10/100
Green
ON
OFF
: Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.

: Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
433
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-8ETIA (HUB)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
S2
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON
Auto MDI/MDI-X OFF

(MDI-X fixed)
OFF
Auto MDI/MDI-X ON
(MDI/MDI-X automatic change)
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON
4
3
2
1
OFF
FUNCTION
CHECK

434
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-2ILCC (ILC)
PN-2ILCC (ILC)
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW2
B21
B11
D1
ALM1
PFA1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
PFA0
SW1
SW0
435
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-2ILCC (ILC)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
B21
Red
No.1 Circuit
B11
D1
Red
Green
B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Link is connected
ALM1
Red

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
PFA1
Red
Power supply status

ON:
Power failure
OFF:
Normal operation
436
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-2ILCC (ILC)
LAMP
NAME
B20
B10
D0
COLOR
Red
Red
Green
FUNCTION
No.0 Circuit
B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):
Busy
Idle
Make Busy
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Link is connected
ALM0
Red

ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
PFA0
Red
Power supply status

ON:
Power failure
OFF:
Normal operation
437
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-2ILCC (ILC)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
AP No.
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
CHECK

set by CM05.
SW4-8: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW4-8: OFF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No.
NOTE 1
FUNCTION
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW2 (Piano SW)
ON
Remote loopback (No.0 Circuit)
OFF
Normal operation
ON
Remote loopback (No.1 Circuit)
OFF
Normal operation
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ON
438
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-2ILCC (ILC)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 (Dip SW)

ON
CHECK
ON

Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.0 Circuit)
ON

Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.0 Circuit)
ON

Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.1 Circuit)
ON

Circuit)
OFF

B2. (No.1 Circuit)
1 2
SW1 (Dip SW)

ON
FUNCTION
1 2

circuit card.
439
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-8IPTA (SIP)
PN-8IPTA (SIP)
DC_CONN
SENS
PZ-24IPLA
NOTE
RUN
MB
SW0
BUSY
DC
L1
L0
LINK
100M
ACT
LAN
RS
NOTE:
Order the PZ-24IPLA card separately.
440
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
PN-8IPTA (SIP)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flash (240 IPM): Initializing this card.

Flash (120 IPM): Normal operation.
OFF:
Idle/Make Busy.
BUSY
Red
ON:
All channels are busy.
Flash (120 IPM): One or more channels are busy (except for a case
where all channels are busy).
OFF:
All channels are idle.
DC
Green
ON:
OFF:
PZ-24IPLA card already mounted is operating.

PZ-24IPLA card is not mounted.
L0
Red
ON:
Disconnection of a link with the IP network has been

detected.
L1
Not used
LINK
Green
ON:
OFF:
Connected to the IP network.

Not connected to the IP network.
100M
Green
ON:
OFF:
Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.

ACT
Green
ON:
OFF:
Data is sending/receiving to the IP network.

Data is not sending/receiving to the IP network.
441
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-8IPTA (SIP)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F

set by CM05.
F
4
AP No.
NOTE 1
SW0-4: ON
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
04
UP
For make-busy
ON
NOTE 2
DOWN

circuit card.
442
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-8IPTA (SIP)
SWITCH NAME
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
CHECK
ON
Not used
OFF
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
Auto Negotiation OFF

(100 Mbps [Full-Duplex] fixed)
OFF
Auto Negotiation ON
(Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic
change)
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
OFF
4
3
2
1
FUNCTION
2
ON
3
NOTE 3

NOTE 3: When using the firmware program of SC-3591 IPS IPTT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPTA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firmware program of SC-3249 IPS IPTT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPTA card, Auto Negotiation function is always set to ON.
443
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-IPTB (IPT)
PN-IPTB (IPT)
PZ-M567
PN-IPTB
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
LINK
TXRX
COL
100M
VCTA
BUSY
SUBOPE3
SUBOPE2
SUBOPE1
SUBOPE0
L3
L2
L1
LYR
VCTA
To 4VCT Card
VCT
VCT
SW2
IP
CONN
IP CONN : To External
LAN Interface
MODE
444
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-IPTB (IPT)
Lamp Indications
PN-IPTB
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
BUSY
Red
ON: At least one line is busy.

OFF: All lines are idle.
SUBOPE3
Green
Remains lit when Card No.3 of 4VCT is operating.
SUBOPE2
Green
SUBOPE1
Green
SUBOPE0
Green
L3
Not used
L2
Green
Remains lit when this card successfully has been registered at the
H.323 gatekeeper. Before the L2 lights, the led is winking.
L1
Green
Remains lit while the line can be used.
LYR
Green
Remains lit when IP network is ready to use.
PZ-M567
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
LINK
Green
ON: Connected to the IP network.

OFF: Not connected to the IP network.
TXRX
Green
Remains lit when sending or receiving IP data.
COL
Green
Remains lit when detecting IP data collision.
100M
Green
ON: Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.

OFF: Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
445
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-IPTB (IPT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F

set by CM05.
F
4
AP No.
NOTE 1
SW1-4: ON
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
04
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
MODE
(Rotary SW)
Auto Negotiation ON NOTE 3

(Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps change
by SW2-1) NOTE 3
0, 1
2-F
Not used

circuit card.
NOTE 3: When you set the MODE switch of the IPT card to 0 (Auto Negotiation On), the communication
mode (Full-Duplex/Half-Duplex) and the communication speed (Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps)
of the Ethernet are adjusted to the switching HUB automatically. When you set the MODE
switch to 1 (Auto Negotiation Off), the communication mode of the Ethernet will be fixed to
Half-Duplex. And the communication speed will be set by SW2-1.
446
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-IPTB (IPT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Dip SW)

1
ON
1 2 3 4
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
ON
Ethernet 100 Mbps
NOTE 4
OFF
Ethernet 10 Mbps
NOTE 4
OFF
Not used
ON
Dynamic Jitter Buffer
OFF
Static Jitter Buffer
ON
Nonlinear processor for echo canceller

is not used.
OFF
Nonlinear processor for echo canceller

is used.
4
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2-5, 7

NOTE 4: These switch settings are valid only when MODE switch (Rotary SW) is set to 1 (Auto Negotiation OFF).
447
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
SENSE
RUN
MAS
MB
SW1
JP1
SW0
AISS
SW2
JPR0
LC
LPB
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
AIS
BL
JPS
JRR1
448
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LC
Green
Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D

channel data links connected.
LPB
Not used
CRC
Red
Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)

errors.
PCM
Red
FRM
Red
RMT
Red
distant office.
AIS
Red

The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.
BL
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
NOTE 1
NOTE 6
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F

set by CM05.
F
4
FUNCTION
AP No.
SW1-4: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
449
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
1
NOTE 3
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
NOTE 3
ON
3
NOTE 5
4
NOTE 5
ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON
Remote loopback
OFF
ON
OFF

450
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
SWITCH NAME
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON
5
NOTE 5
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ON
6
NOTE 5
OFF
ON
FUNCTION
length between the PBX and the C.O. or
CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
7
NOTE 5
OFF
8
OFF
1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)

599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent

(SW1-3 OFF)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7
ON
CHECK
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent
Not used
451
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON
DTI mode
OFF
PRT mode
OFF
Not used
CHECK
OFF
4
3
2
1
FUNCTION

ON
ON
DS-1
OFF
DSX-1
[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
4
NOTE 6
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
452
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
SWITCH NAME
SW2 (Dip SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
OFF
FUNCTION
CHECK
Always set to OFF
[North America only for AT&T]

ON
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ON
Deletion of Area Code on

International Outgoing call
OFF
No deletion of Area Code on

International Outgoing call
[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF

453
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
SWITCH NAME
JPR0 (Jumper pin)
JPR1 (Jumper pin)
JPS (Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
UP

is provided.
DOWN

is not provided.
RIGHT
Line impedance: 100
LEFT
Line impedance: 110
UP

line is provided.
DOWN

DOWN
Always set to DOWN
MAS (Jumper pin)
AISS (Jumper pin)
UP

or power on.
DOWN
JP1 (Jumper pin)

LEFT
Always set to LEFT

454
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
circuit card.
PRT0
CONDITIONS
When one PRT

is provided.
When more than

one PRT is provided.
PRT1
PRT2
SW SW SW SW SW SW
0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2
ON OFF
PRT7
SW SW
0-1 0-2
REMARKS

clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input.

its PLO0 input, under
normal conditions.
OFF OFF
occurs with PRT0, MP
PRT1.
NOTE 4: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
then DOWN.
455
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-30PRTA (PRT)
PN-30PRTA (PRT)
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW
JP1
JPS
SW1
LC
LPB
PCM
FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
BL
JPR
JP
456
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30PRTA (PRT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LC
Green

LPB
Not used
PCM
Red
FRM
Red
MFRM
Red

slot 16.
RMT
Red
MRMT
Red
office.
AIS
Red

BL
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: 2 to 10 channels are busy
457
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30PRTA (PRT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
SW-8: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW-8: OFF
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
SW No.
NOTE 1
NOTE 5
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
CHECK

set by CM05.
AP No.
FUNCTION
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
NOTE 2
DOWN

458
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-30PRTA (PRT)
SWITCH
NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
NOTE 3
ON
3
4
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON
Remote loopback
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Coaxial cable (75 )
OFF

OFF
OFF
8
NOTE 5
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
459
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-30PRTA (PRT)
SWITCH
NAME
SW1 (Dip SW)
ON
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
CHECK
460
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30PRTA (PRT)
SWITCH
NAME
JPS
(Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT
JPR
(Jumper pin)
JP
(Jumper pin)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
(For coaxial cable)
DOWN

(For coaxial cable)
RIGHT
Line impedance: 75
(For coaxial cable)
LEFT
Line impedance: 120

JP1 (Jumper pin)

DOWN
Always set to DOWN

circuit card.
461
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-30PRTA (PRT)

PRT0
CONDITIONS
When one PRT is

provided.
When more than

one PRT is
provided.
PRT1
PRT2
SW SW SW SW SW SW
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
ON OFF
PRT7
SW SW
-1 -2
REMARKS
its PLO0 input.

its PLO0 input, under normal conditions.
OFF OFF
occurs with PRT0, MP
PRT1.
NOTE 4: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
462
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-4RSTB (MFR)
PN-4RSTB (MFR)
SENS
RUN
MB
SW
OPE3
OPE2
OPE1
OPE0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
OPE0-3
Red
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.

Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
463
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-4RSTB (MFR)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
CHECK

set by CM05
AP No.
FUNCTION
SW-8: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW-8: OFF
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
SW No.
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
4
ON
ON
For make-busy No. 0 circuit
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31

circuit card.
464
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
JP0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
BL0-3
Red
Remains lit when receiving a CALLER ID (CLASS SM) signal.
465
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
NOTE 1
NOTE 3
CHECK

set by CM05.
AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW No.
FUNCTION
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
1
2
4
3
2
1
3
ON
4
JP0
(Jumper pin)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
RIGHT

circuit card.
NOTE 3: When accommodating the CIR card (PN-4RSTC-A) on Remote site, be sure to set SENSE switch
of all the CIR cards to AP Number 15. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each CIR card. If a different site is used to accommodate the CIR card, be sure to set
SENSE switch to switch No. 15.
466
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-SC00 (CCH)
PN-SC00 (CCH)
SW1
SENS
RUN
MB
SW0
LC
LPB
RS
To Modem
( For Analog Interface)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LC
Green
LPB
Green
467
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-SC00 (CCH)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
CHECK

set by CM05.
AP No.
FUNCTION
SW0-4: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
ON
Loopback test
OFF
ON
Analog interface
OFF
Digital interface
ON
RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM) ON

NOTE 3
OFF
RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM)

OFF
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
468
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-SC00 (CCH)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Dip SW)
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
ON
TRANSMISSION
SPEED
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
SW
1-3
SW
1-4
SW
1-5
48 Kbps NOTE 4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
48 Kbps NOTE 4
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
56 Kbps
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
64 Kbps
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

transmission speed (For Analog Interface)
ON
OFF
ON
CHECK

ON
1
ON
FUNCTION
Set switches (SW1-1 - SW1-5) to

OFF.
OFF
OFF
Not used
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF

circuit card.
NOTE 3: This setting is available when SW0-2 is set to ON (Analog Interface).
SW1-3: OFF
SW1-3: ON
48 Kbps
1
48 Kbps
1
Data
1
Data
469
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-SC01 (DCH)
PN-SC01 (DCH)
SW1
SENS
RUN
MB
SW0
LC
LPB
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
LC
Green

LPB
Green
Not used
470
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-SC01 (DCH)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
AP No.
SW0-4: ON
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
NOTE 1
CHECK

set by CM05.
F
4
FUNCTION
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
4
ON
471
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-SC01 (DCH)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
SW1 (Dip SW)
OFF
Always set to OFF
ON
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHECK

circuit card.
472
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-SC03-B/PN-SC03-C (CSH)
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
DOPE7
DOPE6
DOPE5
DOPE4
DOPE3
DOPE2
DOPE1
DOPE0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
DOPE7-0
Green
Remains lit when D channel link with CSI card is connected.

CSI Card No.
Circuit No.
DOPE7
CSI3
No.1
DOPE6
CSI3
No.0
DOPE5
CSI2
No.1
DOPE4
CSI2
No.0
DOPE3
CSI1
No.1
DOPE2
CSI1
No.0
DOPE1
CSI0
No.1
DOPE0
CSI0
No.0
473
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
SW1-4: ON
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
NOTE 1
CHECK

set by CM05.
AP No.
FUNCTION
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
ON
60 ms synchronization clock ON
OFF
60 ms synchronization clock OFF
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
ON

circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the U-interface CS (ZT) is used, one CSH card per system must be set to the SW1-1 switch
ON. And mount the CSH card which SW1-1 is set to ON into PIM0.
NOTE 4: When the S-interface CS (ZT) is used, set the SW1-1 switch to OFF.
474
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-SC03-B (ICH)
PN-SC03-B (ICH)
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
DOPE7
DOPE6
DOPE5
DOPE4
DOPE3
DOPE2
DOPE1
DOPE0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
DOPE7
Green
Remains lit when No. 7 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE6
Green
DOPE5
Green
DOPE4
Green
DOPE3
Green
DOPE2
Green
DOPE1
Green
DOPE0
Green
475
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PN-SC03-B (ICH)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
SW1-4: ON
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
NOTE 1
CHECK

set by CM05.
AP No.
FUNCTION
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
4
ON

circuit card.
476
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
FACE
SW
REAR
CONNR
CONNR: To CONN connector on

PN-AP00-B (AP00)
477
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW (Dip SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
FUNCTION
ON

(Battery backup ON)
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
CHECK

478
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
Mounting PZ-M537 Card

When mounting the EXPMEM card on the AP00 card, do the following procedure.
STEP1: Take off three screws from the rear side of EXPMEM support.
NOTE: Supports and screws are attached to the EXPMEM card.
STEP2: Connect the CONNR connector on the EXPMEM card and the CONN connector on the AP00
card.
STEP3: Secure the EXPMEM card to the AP00 card with three screws which have been taken off by
STEP1.
Mounting EXPMEM Card on AP00 Card
SUPPORT
EXPMEM CARD
CONNR CONNECTOR
EXPMEM CARD
AP00 CARD
CONN CONNECTOR
479
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
PZ-M542 (CONN)
PZ-M542 (CONN)
RCV21
JP1
To Champ
Connector (MDF)
LTC
JP2
TRS21
FOR
No.1
CIRCUIT
RCV11
LT
TRS01
JP0
RCV01
TRS11
FOR
No.2
CIRCUIT
To LTC Connector
on BWB in PIM
FOR
No.0
CIRCUIT
COAXIAL CONNECTOR
Lamp Indications
480
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PZ-M542 (CONN)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
JP0
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT
JP1
RIGHT
LEFT
JP2
RIGHT
LEFT
FUNCTION
CHECK
For coaxial connectors

(No.0 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.0 circuit)
(No.1 circuit)
For champ connector
(No.2 circuit)
For champ connector

481
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PZ-M557 (CONN)
PZ-M557 (CONN)
JP2
FOR
No.2
CIRCUIT
TRS20
RCV10
JP1
JP0
LTC
TRS10
To Champ
Connector (MDF)
RCV20
FOR
No.0
CIRCUIT
RCV00
FOR
No.1
CIRCUIT
LT
To LTC Connector
on BWB in PIM
TRS00
COAXIAL CONNECTOR
Lamp Indications
482
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
PZ-M557 (CONN)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
JP0
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT
JP1
RIGHT
LEFT
JP2
RIGHT
LEFT
FUNCTION
CHECK

(No.0 circuit)
For champ connector
(No.1 circuit)
For champ connector
(No.2 circuit)
For champ connector

483
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

LINE/TRUNK CARD
LINE/TRUNK CARD
The table below shows the line/trunk cards to be explained in this section.
List of Line/Trunk Cards
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT
ALLOWED
REFERENCE
PAGE
PN-2AMPA (AMP)
Page 488
PN-CFTA (CFT)
Page 489
PN-CFTB (CFT)
Page 490
PN-2COTD (COT)
Page 491
PN-2COTE (COT)
Page 492
PN-4COTA-A
(COT)
Page 493
PN-4COTB (COT)
Page 494
PN-4COTE (COT)
Page 495
PN-4COTF (COT)
Page 496
PN-4COTG (COT)
Page 497
PN-6COTJ (COT)
Page 498
PN-8COTH (COT)
Page 499
PN-8COTQ (COT)
Page 500
PN-8COTR (COT)
Page 501
PN-8COTS (COT)
Page 502
PN-8COTT (COT)
Page 503
PN-8COTU (COT)
Page 504
PN-2CSIA (CSI)
Page 505
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
Page 508
*MB = Make Busy
484
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

LINE/TRUNK CARD
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT
ALLOWED
REFERENCE
PAGE
PN-2CSIH (CSI)
Page 511
PN-4CSIA (CSI)
Page 514
PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)
Page 517
PN-4DATC (DAT)
Page 520
PN-4DIDA (DIT)
Page 521
PN-2DITA (DIT)
Page 522
PN-4DITB (DIT)
Page 523
PN-DK00 (DK)
Page 524
PN-2DLCN (DLC)
Page 525
PN-4DLCM (DLC)
Page 526
PN-4DLCT (DLC)
Page 527
PN-4DLCQ (DLC)
Page 528
PN-8DLCL (DLC)
Page 529
PN-8DLCP (DLC)
Page 530
PN-2ILCA (ILC)
Page 531
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
Page 534
PN-32IPLA
(IP-PAD)
Page 537
PN-32IPLA-A
(IP-PAD)
Page 541
PN-4LCC (LC)
Page 545
PN-4LCD-A (LC)
Page 546
PN-4LCE (LC)
Page 547
*MB = Make Busy
485
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

LINE/TRUNK CARD
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT
ALLOWED
REFERENCE
PAGE
PN-4LCF (LC)
Page 548
PN-4LCK (LC)
Page 549
PN-4LCL (LC)
Page 550
PN-4LCV (LC)
Page 551
PN-4LCW (LC)
Page 552
PN-8LCAA (LC)
Page 553
PN-8LCAB (LC)
Page 554
PN-8LCAD (LC)
Page 555
PN-8LCAE (LC)
Page 556
PN-8LCAF (LC)
Page 557
PN-8LCAK (LC)
Page 558
PN-2LDTA (LDT)
Page 559
PN-4LDTA (LDT)
Page 560
PN-4LLCB (LLC)
Page 561
PN-M10 (M10)
Page 563
PN-M13 (M13)
Page 565
PN-2ODTA (ODT)
Page 566
PN-2ODTB (ODT)
Page 567
PN-4ODTA (ODT)
Page 568
PN-4RSTF/
PN-4RSTF-A
(SDT)
Page 570
PN-4RSTH (SDT)
Page 571
PN-8RSTG (PBR)
Page 572
*MB = Make Busy

486
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

LINE/TRUNK CARD
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT
ALLOWED
REFERENCE
PAGE
PN-RTA (RTA)
PN-TNTA (TNT)
Page 576
PN-4VCTI (4VCT)
Page 578
PN-16VCTA/
PN-16VCTA-A
(16VCT)
Page 580
PZ-8PFTB (PFT)
Page 582
PZ-M623 (ETHER)
Page 583
PZ-M649 (DTI)
Page 584
PZ-M650 (DTI)
Page 587
PZ-VM00/
PZ-VM00-M
(VM00)/
PZ-VM10-M
(VM10)
PZ-VM01 (VM01)
Page 593
PZ-VM02 (VM02)
Page 594
PZ-VM03-M
(VM03)
Page 597
PZ-VM04 (VM04)
Page 602
PZ-VM05 (VM05)
Page 603
PZ-VM06 (VM06)
Page 603
NOTE
Page 573
Page 590
*MB = Make Busy

NOTE:
It is allowed to plugging/unplugging PN-RTA (RTA) card, after flip the PWRSW switch to UP
position (Operating power is off).
487
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-2AMPA (AMP)
PN-2AMPA (AMP)
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
488
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-CFTA (CFT)
PN-CFTA (CFT)
BL
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Remains lit when this card is in use.
Flashes (60 IPM) when the circuit on the card is in make-busy state
on the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
489
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-CFTB (CFT)
PN-CFTB (CFT)
BL
JP0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Remains lit when this card is in use.
Flashes (60 IPM) when the circuit on the card is in make-busy state
on the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
JP0
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT
FUNCTION
CHECK
6/10 Party Conference

(When using two PN-CFTB cards)
Not used
490
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2COTD (COT)
PN-2COTD (COT)
BL1
BL0
LF1
LF0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0, 1
Red

LF0, 1
Red
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a meter signal or a

line fault condition.
Switch Settings
491
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2COTE (COT)
PN-2COTE (COT)
BL1
BL0
LF1
LF0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0, 1
Red

LF0, 1
Red
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a meter signal or a

line fault condition.
Switch Settings
492
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
PN-4COTA-A (COT)
PN-4COTA-A (COT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
CN1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
493
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4COTB (COT)
PN-4COTB (COT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
CN1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
494
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4COTE (COT)
PN-4COTE (COT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0
CN1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0-3
Red

LF0-3
Red
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault condition.
Switch Settings
495
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4COTF (COT)
PN-4COTF (COT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
CN1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
496
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4COTG (COT)
PN-4COTG (COT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
CN1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
497
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-6COTJ (COT)
PN-6COTJ (COT)
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
LF5
LF4
LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0-5
Red

LF0-5
Red
Switch Settings
498
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8COTH (COT)
PN-8COTH (COT)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
499
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8COTQ (COT)
PN-8COTQ (COT)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
500
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8COTR (COT)
PN-8COTR (COT)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
501
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8COTS (COT)
PN-8COTS (COT)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
502
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8COTT (COT)
PN-8COTT (COT)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
LF7
LF6
LF5
LF4
LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0-7
Red

LF0-7
Red
Switch Settings
503
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8COTU (COT)
PN-8COTU (COT)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
504
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2CSIA (CSI)
PN-2CSIA (CSI)
OPE
LB
B13
B12
B11
B10
B03
B02
B01
B00
DL1
DL0
505
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2CSIA (CSI)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
OPE
Green
LB
Red
B13
Red
Not used (Flash [60 IPM])
B12
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B11
B10
Red
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.

: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
B03
Red
B02
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B01
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

506
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2CSIA (CSI)
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
B00
Red
FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
DL0
(Rotary SW)
0
0
FUNCTION
CHECK
0-F
1-F
Not used
NOTE
DL1
(Rotary SW)
0
0
0-F
1-F
Not used
NOTE
NOTE:
Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
507
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
OPE
LB
B13
B12
B11
B10
SP
B03
B02
B01
B00
DL1
DL0
508
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
OPE
Green
LB
Red
B13
Red
B12
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B11
B10
Red
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
B03
Red
B02
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B01
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

509
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
B00
Red
FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
DL0
(Rotary SW)
0
0
FUNCTION
CHECK
0-F
1-F
Not used
NOTE
DL1
(Rotary SW)
0
0
0-F
1-F
Not used
UP
NOTE
SP (jumper SW)
1
2
3
Front
DOWN
Not used

NOTE:
Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
510
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2CSIH (CSI)
PN-2CSIH (CSI)
OPE
LB
B12
B11
B10
B02
B01
B00
511
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2CSIH (CSI)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
OPE
Green
ON
LB
Red
ON : When a loopback is in progress

OFF : For normal operation
B12
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B11
B10
B02
B01
Red
Red
Red
Red
: For normal operation
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.
512
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2CSIH (CSI)
LAMP
NAME
B00
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

Switch Settings
513
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4CSIA (CSI)
PN-4CSIA (CSI)
OPE
LB1
LB0
BSY32
BSY31
BSY30
BSY22
BSY21
BSY20
BSY12
BSY11
BSY10
BSY02
BSY01
BSY00
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
OPE
Green
ON
LB0
Red
No.0 circuit and No.1 circuit status

LB1
Red

514
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4CSIA (CSI)
LAMP
NAME
BSY32
BSY31
BSY30
BSY22
BSY21
BSY20
COLOR
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

515
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4CSIA (CSI)
LAMP
NAME
BSY12
BSY11
BSY10
BSY02
BSY01
BSY00
COLOR
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

Switch Settings
516
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)
PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)
OPE
LB1
LB0
BSY32
BSY31
BSY30
BSY22
BSY21
BSY20
BSY12
BSY11
BSY10
BSY02
BSY01
BSY00
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
OPE
Green
ON
LB0
Red

LB1
Red

517
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)
LAMP
NAME
BSY32
BSY31
BSY30
BSY22
BSY21
BSY20
COLOR
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

518
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)
LAMP
NAME
BSY12
BSY11
BSY10
BSY02
BSY01
BSY00
COLOR
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

Switch Settings
519
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4DATC (DAT)
PN-4DATC (DAT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
520
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4DIDA (DIT)
PN-4DIDA (DIT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
521
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
PN-2DITA (DIT)
PN-2DITA (DIT)
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
522
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4DITB (DIT)
PN-4DITB (DIT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
523
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-DK00 (DK)
PN-DK00 (DK)
Lamp Indications
Switch Settings
524
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2DLCN (DLC)
PN-2DLCN (DLC)
BL1
BL0
CN0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
525
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4DLCM (DLC)
PN-4DLCM (DLC)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
526
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4DLCT (DLC)
PN-4DLCT (DLC)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
527
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
PN-4DLCQ (DLC)
PN-4DLCQ (DLC)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
528
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8DLCL (DLC)
PN-8DLCL (DLC)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
529
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8DLCP (DLC)
PN-8DLCP (DLC)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
530
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2ILCA (ILC)
PN-2ILCA (ILC)
ACT1
PAL1
LPB1
B21
B11
ACT0
PAL0
LPB0
B20
B10
SW1
SW0
531
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2ILCA (ILC)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
ACT1
Green
No.1
Circuit
PAL1
Red
ON: Line is short-circuiting.

OFF: Normally operating.
LPB1
Red
OFF: Not used.
B21
Red
ON: B2 channel is in use.

OFF: B2 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B2 channel is in make busy state.
B11
Red

ACT0
Green
PAL0
Red
ON: Line is short-circuiting.

OFF: Normally operating.
LPB0
Red
OFF: Not used
B20
Red

B10
Red

No. 0
Circuit
ON: Normally operating.

OFF: Not operating.
ON: Normally operating.

OFF: Not operating.
532
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2ILCA (ILC)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
Always set to OFF
ON
1
OFF
OFF
4
3
2
1
FUNCTION
ON
2
OFF
ON
ON
3
OFF
ON
4
OFF
CHECK
No.0
Circuit
(Receiving)
Terminating register is
provided.
No.0
Circuit
(Sending)
provided.
No.1
Circuit
(Receiving)
provided.
No.1
Circuit
(Sending)
provided.
not provided.
not provided.
not provided.
not provided.

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure
and
533
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
DC_CONN
SENS
PZ-24IPLA
NOTE
RUN
MB
SW0
BUSY
DC
L1
L0
LINK
100M
ACT
LAN
RS
NOTE:
Order the PZ-24IPLA card separately.
534
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flash (240 IPM): Initializing this card.

Flash (120 IPM): Normal operation.
OFF:
Idle/Make Busy.
BUSY
Red
ON:
All channels are busy.
Flash (120 IPM): One or more channels are busy (except for a case
where all channels are busy).
OFF:
All channels are idle.
DC
Green
ON:
OFF:
PZ-24IPLA card already mounted is operating.

PZ-24IPLA card is not mounted.
L0
Red
ON:
Disconnection of a link with the IP network has been

detected.
L1
Green
ON:
OFF:
G723.1 is enabled.
G723.1 is disabled.
LINK
Green
ON:
OFF:
Connected to the IP network.

Not connected to the IP network.
100M
Green
ON:
OFF:

ACT
Green
ON:
OFF:
Data is sending/receiving to the IP network.

Data is not sending/receiving to the IP network.
535
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 1
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON

(100 Mbps [Full-Duplex] fixed)
OFF
Auto Negotiation ON
change)
OFF
Not used
3
NOTE 2

circuit card.
NOTE 2: When using the firmware program of SC-3330 IPS IPADT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPLA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firmware program of SC-3213 IPS IPADT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPLA card, Auto Negotiation
function is always set to ON.
536
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
PN-32IPLA
PZ-M571
SUBA
PZ-M572 PN-32IPLA
RUN
VC3
VC2
VC1
VC0
SUBB
MB
RUN
MB
SW0
SW0
BL
LOAD
PCON
AUX
VCTB
VCTB
VCTA
VCTA
VCTB/VCTA:
To 16VCT Card VCT1A/
VCT0A Connector
LAN:
To LAN
LAN
MODE
PZ-M571
NALM
LINK
IPDL
100M
TX
RX
COL
LAN
MODE
537
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
Lamp Indications
PN-32IPLA
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flash (120 IPM) : This card is operating normally.

OFF
BL
Red
ON : At least one line is busy.

OFF : All lines are idle.
LOAD
Not used
PCON
Not used
AUX
Not used
VC3
Remains lit when the last 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without

Card No.1 of 16VCT.
VC2
Green
Remains lit when Card No. 1 of 16VCT is operating.
VC1
Green
Remains lit when the first 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without

Card No.0 of 16VCT.
VC0
Green
PZ-M571
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
NALM
Not used
LINK
Green
ON : Connected to the IP network.

OFF : Not connected to the IP network.
IPDL
Not used
100M
Green
ON : Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.

OFF : Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
TX
Green
ON : Sending IP data
OFF : Not sending IP data
RX
Green
ON : Receiving IP data
OFF : Not receiving IP data
COL
Yellow
ON
: Detecting IP data collision
538
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
Switch Settings
PN-32IPLA
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
DOWN
NOTE
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON
NOTE:
circuit card.
539
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
PZ-M571
SWITCH NAME
MODE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
0-F
FUNCTION
CHECK
Auto Negotiation ON
change)

(10 Mbps [Half-Duplex] fixed)

1, 2, 5-F
Not used

540
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-32IPLA-A
PZ-M632
PZ-M633 PN-32IPLA-A
SUBA
RUN
MB
RUN
MB
SW0
SW0
VC3
VC2
VC1
VC0
BL
LOAD
PCON
AUX
VCTB
VCTA
SUBB
VCTB/VCTA:
To 16VCT Card VCT1A/
VCT0A Connector
VCTB
MODE
VCTA
LAN
LAN:
To LAN
PZ-M632
NALM
LINK
IPDL
100M
TX
RX
COL
MODE
LAN
541
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
Lamp Indications
PN-32IPLA-A
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flash (120 IPM) : This card is operating normally.

OFF
BL
Red
ON : At least one line is busy.

OFF : All lines are idle.
LOAD
Not used
PCON
Not used
AUX
Not used
VC3
Remains lit when the last 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without

Card No.1 of 16VCT.
VC2
Green
VC1
Remains lit when the first 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without

Card No.0 of 16VCT.
VC0
Green
PZ-M632
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
NALM
Not used
LINK
Green
ON : Connected to the IP network.

OFF : Not connected to the IP network.
IPDL
Not used
100M
Green
ON : Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.

OFF : Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
TX
Green
ON : Sending IP data
OFF : Not sending IP data
RX
Green
ON : Receiving IP data
OFF : Not receiving IP data
COL
Yellow
ON
: Detecting IP data collision
542
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
Switch Settings
PN-32IPLA-A
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
DOWN
NOTE
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
NOTE:
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
circuit card.
543
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-M632
SWITCH NAME
MODE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
0-F
FUNCTION
CHECK
Auto Negotiation ON
change)

(100 Mbps [Full-Duplex] fixed) NOTE


2, 5-F
Not used

NOTE:
When using the firmware program of SC-3150 IPS IPPAD PROG-C1 or later for the PN32IPLA-A card, you may set the MODE switch to 1 (Auto Negotiation OFF [100 Mbps <FullDuplex> fixed]). When using the firmware program of SC-3090 IPS IPPAD PROG-B1 for the
PN-32IPLA-A card, you may not set the MODE switch to 1.
544
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
PN-4LCC (LC)
PN-4LCC (LC)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
545
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4LCD-A (LC)
PN-4LCD-A (LC)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
546
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4LCE (LC)
PN-4LCE (LC)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
547
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4LCF (LC)
PN-4LCF (LC)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
548
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4LCK (LC)
PN-4LCK (LC)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
549
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4LCL (LC)
PN-4LCL (LC)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
550
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4LCV (LC)
PN-4LCV (LC)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
551
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4LCW (LC)
PN-4LCW (LC)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
552
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8LCAA (LC)
PN-8LCAA (LC)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
553
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8LCAB (LC)
PN-8LCAB (LC)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
554
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8LCAD (LC)
PN-8LCAD (LC)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
555
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8LCAE (LC)
PN-8LCAE (LC)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
556
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8LCAF (LC)
PN-8LCAF (LC)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
557
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-8LCAK (LC)
PN-8LCAK (LC)
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
558
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PN-2LDTA (LDT)
PN-2LDTA (LDT)
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
559
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4LDTA (LDT)
PN-4LDTA (LDT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
560
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4LLCB (LLC)
PN-4LLCB (LLC)
MORVS
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
561
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4LLCB (LLC)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
MORVS
(Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
UP
DOWN
FUNCTION
CHECK
Momentary Open
Reverse

562
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-M10 (M10)
PN-M10 (M10)
JP3
JP4
CN1
JP1
JP0
CK0
CK1
TALM
RALM
To Optical Fiber
JP2
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
CK0
Green
Remains lit when a Digital Trunk Interface is connected to No. 0 circuit

on this card.
CK1
Green
Remains lit when a Digital Trunk Interface is connected to No. 1 circuit

on this card.
TALM
Red
Remains lit when optical output is stopped.
RALM
Red
Remains lit when optical input is lost or stopped.
563
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-M10 (M10)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
JP0, 1
(Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
UP
When connected to E1 (2 M) Digital

Trunk Interface
When connected to T1 (1.5 M) Digital
Trunk Interface
RIGHT
Line code: B8ZS* is provided

(For T1 interface)
*B8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution
LEFT
Line code: B8ZS* is not provide

(For T1 interface)
*B8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution
RIGHT
LEFT
JP4 (Jumper pin)
CHECK
DOWN
JP2 (Jumper pin)
JP3 (Jumper pin)
FUNCTION
UP
DOWN

Trunk Interface
Trunk Interface
Trunk Interface
Trunk Interface
564
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-M13 (M13)
PN-M13 (M13)
LC
TEL
Lamp Indications
Switch Settings
565
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2ODTA (ODT)
PN-2ODTA (ODT)
BL1
BL0
CN1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
566
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-2ODTB (ODT)
PN-2ODTB (ODT)
BL1
BL0
CN1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
567
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4ODTA (ODT)
PN-4ODTA (ODT)
JP3
JP2
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
JP1
JP0
CN3
To E&M
Connector Pin
CN2
CN1
To 2,3 Circuit
Tx/Rx
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
568
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4ODTA (ODT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
JP0-3 (Jumper Pin)

GND
UP
Always set to UP
OPEN
569
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4RSTF/PN-4RSTF-A (SDT)
PN-4RSTF/PN-4RSTF-A (SDT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
570
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
PN-4RSTH (SDT)
PN-4RSTH (SDT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Switch Settings
571
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-8RSTG (PBR)
PN-8RSTG (PBR)
Lamp Indications
Switch Settings
572
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-RTA (RTA)
PN-RTA (RTA)
PWR
ALM
BUSY
SWM
PWRSW
L1LNK
L1ACT
L1SPD
L2LNK
L2ACT
LAN2: To 10BASE-T
SUBCONN
LAN1: To 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Console: To Local Console
573
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-RTA (RTA)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
PWR
Green
ON : Operating power is ON.

OFF: Operating power is OFF.
ALM
Red
Remains lit when a trouble occurs.
BUSY
Green
NOTE 1
Remain lit while writing/reading the data to/from the flash memory.
L1LNK
Green
Remains lit while LAN1 port is connected to the network.
L1ACT
Green
Flashes while LAN1 port is sending or receiving the data.
L1SPD
Green
Remains lit while LAN1 port is operating at 100 Mbps.
L2LNK
Green
Remains lit while LAN2 port is connected to the network.
L2ACT
Green
Flashes while LAN2 port is sending or receiving the data.
Switch Settings
CAUTION
SWITCH NAME
PWRSW
(Toggle SW)
NOTE 2
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
UP
Operating power is OFF
DOWN
Operating power is ON
CHECK
574
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-RTA (RTA)
SWITCH NAME
SWM
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON
Test Mode
OFF
ON
For aging
OFF
OFF
Not used
ON
Super Reset
OFF
CHECK
OFF
4
3
2
1
FUNCTION
2
ON

NOTE 1: Do not turn off the system power and operating power of PN-RTA card while the BUSY lamp is
lit.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the PWRSW switch to UP position (Operating power is off) before
plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
575
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-TNTA (TNT)
PN-TNTA (TNT)
SW
JACK1
JACK0
Lamp Indications
576
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-TNTA (TNT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW
(Piano Key SW)
CHECK
Volume adjustment for No.0 circuit
SWITCH NUMBER
OFF
4
3
2
1
FUNCTION
1, 2
ON
VOLUME
OFF
OFF
10 dB
ON
OFF
7 dB
OFF
ON
4 dB
ON
ON
1 dB
Volume adjustment for No.1 circuit
SWITCH NUMBER
3, 4
VOLUME
OFF
OFF
10 dB
ON
OFF
7 dB
OFF
ON
4 dB
ON
ON
1 dB
577
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4VCTI (4VCT)
PN-4VCTI (4VCT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
SW1
IPTA
IPT
IPTA/IPT:
To IPT Card VCTA/VCT Connector
or
To Other 4VCT Card EXPA/EXP
Connector
EXPA
EXP
EXPA/EXP:
To IPTA/IPT Connector of
Other 4VCT Card
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
578
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-4VCTI (4VCT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
FUNCTION
Set the number per 4VCT card if two or more 4VCT

cards are used. (Maximum four 4VCT cards)
SW No.
OFF
4
3
2
1
CHECK
1, 2
ON
3
4
Card No.
1-1
1-2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Not used
Not used

579
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT)
BL0
SW1
VCT1B
VCT0B
VCT1A
VCT0A
VCT1B/VCT0B:
To VCT1A/VCT0A Connector on
Another 16VCT Card
VCT1A/VCT0A:
To IP-PAD Card VCTB/VCTA Connector
or
To VCT1B/VCT0B Connector on
Another 16VCT Card
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Remains lit when 0-15 channels are busy.
580
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
FUNCTION
Set the number per 16VCT card if two 16VCT cards

are used. (Maximum two 16VCT cards)
SW No.
OFF
1, 2
4
3
2
1
CHECK
ON
3
4
Card No.
1-1
1-2
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Not used
Not used

581
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-8PFTB (PFT)
PZ-8PFTB (PFT)
PFT1
PFT0
Lamp Indications
Switch Settings
582
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-M623 (ETHER)
PZ-M623 (ETHER)
FACE
REAR
W1LNK
W1ACT
LAN
CONN
CONN : To SUBCONN Connector on PN-RTA
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
W1LNK
Green
Remains lit while LAN port is connected to the network.
W1ACT
Green
Flashes while LAN port is sending or receiving the data.
Switch Settings
583
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-M649 (DTI)
PZ-M649 (DTI)
FACE
REAR
PBXRED W1LNK
PBXYEL W1ACT
PBXBLU
SW
WAN
CONN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
W1LNK
Green
Remains lit while WAN port is connected to the network.
W1ACT
Green
Flashes while WAN port is sending or receiving the data.
PBXRED
Red
Remains lit when a trouble occurs in T1 interface for PBX (PCM loss/
Multi Frame loss/Frame loss).
PBXYEL
Red
Remains lit when a trouble occurs in T1 interface for PBX (PMT

Alarm).
PBXBLU
Red
Remains lit when a trouble occurs in T1 interface for PBX (AIS

Alarm).
584
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-M649 (DTI)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)
ON
1
2
3
4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
2
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
3
4
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON

sent to the PLO0 input on MP card
(1.5 MHz clock).
OFF

(1.5 MHz clock).
ON

(1.5 MHz clock).
OFF

(1.5 MHz clock).
OFF
Not used
ON
WAN port or T1 interface for PBX are

available.
OFF
Only WAN port is available.

585
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-M649 (DTI)
DTI0
DTI1
DTI2
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
When one DTI is
provided.
When more than

one DTI is provided.
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
DTI7
SW
SW
-1
-2
REMARKS
MP card will receive
the clock signal from
DTI0 at its PLO0
input.

DTI0 at its PLO0
input, under normal
conditions.
occurs with DTI0, MP
card will automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which
gets clock from DTI1.
PIM0 to OFF.
586
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-M650 (DTI)
PZ-M650 (DTI)
FACE
REAR
W1LNK
W1ACT
SW
WAN
CONN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
W1LNK
Green
Remains lit while WAN port is connected to the network.
W1ACT
Green
Flashes while WAN port is sending or receiving the data.
587
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-M650 (DTI)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)
ON
1
2
3
4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON

(2.048 MHz clock).
OFF

(2.048 MHz clock).
ON

(2.048 MHz clock).
OFF

(2.048 MHz clock).
OFF
Not used
ON
Fixed
1
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
2
NOTE 1
NOTE 2

588
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-M650 (DTI)
DTI0
DTI1
DTI2
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
When one DTI is
provided.
When more than

one DTI is provided.
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
DTI7
SW
SW
-1
-2
REMARKS
DTI0 at its PLO0
input.

DTI0 at its PLO0
input, under normal
conditions.
occurs with DTI0, MP
card will automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which
gets clock from DTI1.
PIM0 to OFF.
589
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10)

CPU Board (Top Side)
CPU Board (top side)
RXD
TXD
MOD
RI
COM2
VM00/VM00-M/VM10-M Card
SW1-4
SW1-1
COM1
HDD
BIOS
Internal modem
NOTE: Only the PZVM00 is not

equipped with internal modem.
DSP Board (Bottom Side)

VM00/VM00-M/VM10-M Card
DSP Board (bottom side)

BL7
BL0
SWP
MB
DSP
PL3
PL0
RST
CN3
(VM01 Card Slot)
590
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
CPU
Board
FUNCTION
RXD
Green
Not used
TXD
Red
Not used
MOD
Green
Not used
RI
Red
Incoming call
HDD
Red
Accessing to the HDD
Built-in hard disk is faulty
Red
BIOS programming is in operation
DOS mode has been activated
BIOS
DSP
Board
COLOR
BL0-7 Red

SWP
Red
20 seconds after the MB switch is turned ON (upward) (The circuit

card can be plugged/unplugged while this pilot lamp is on.)
DSP
Green/
Flashing
According to voice mail application program in use.
Red/
Flashing
PL0-3
Red
DSP circuit operating
591
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 1
RST (Toggle SW)
Push when starting up this card, after MB switch is set

to DOWN position.
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
BIOS Redirect Utility (Key board)

NOTE 3
OFF
Normal Operation
ON
BIOS Redirect Utility (Floppy Drive)

NOTE 3
OFF
Normal Operation
ON
COM2: Use internal modem for remote

maintenance
OFF
COM2: RS-232C (For local direct connection to maintenance console)
OFF
Not used
ON
NOTE 2

circuit card.
NOTE 2: When SW1 settings have changed, RST switch must be pushed.
NOTE 3: Use BIOS Redirect only when assisted by NEC.
592
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
PZ-VM01 (VM01)
PZ-VM01 (VM01)
VM01 Card (on VM00/VM10 DSP Board)
PL7
PL4
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
PL4-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
DSP circuit operating
Switch Settings
593
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
PZ-VM02 (VM02)
PZ-VM02 (VM02)
CPU Board
(top side)
SW1
CN3
(HDD)
HDD
Internal
modem
SW2
ALM
SWAP
HDD
APL
BIOS
CN7 (COM1)
CN8 (COM2)
CN14 (MONI)
CN9 (PARA)
LINK
100M
CN10 (To LAN)
FAN
CN11 (USB)
CN12 (PS/2)
SW4
CN15 (FAN)
NOTE:
SW3
HDD is a local content product.
594
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-VM02 (VM02)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
ALM
Red
Flashes when this card is operating normally.
HDD
Green
Flashes when loading BIOS bootstrap programs (When this card is

starting up), and when accessing the internal HDD.
BIOS
Green
Lights when BIOS program starts and goes out when OS program
starts.
SWAP
Red
Lights when OS is shut down.
APL
Green/Red
According to application software.
LINK
Green
Lights when LAN link pulse is detected.

Flashes when LAN data is transferred and received.
100M
Green
Indicates LAN is connected in 100 Mbps.
595
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-VM02 (VM02)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
(Rotary SW)
0-F
Reset of the VM02 card
Power Button of the VM02 card
2-F
SW2
(Push SW)
SW3
(Piano Key SW)
FUNCTION
CHECK
Not used
When rebooting the VM02 card, push
SW2 switch after setting SW1 switch to
0.
When making power of the VM02 card
ON/OFF, push SW2 switch after setting
SW1 switch to 1.
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON
Not used
OFF
COM2 is used for RS-232C port
OFF
Not used
OFF
2
1
ON
SW4
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
2
1
2
ON
596
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-VM03-M (VM03)
PZ-VM03-M (VM03)
CPU Board (Top Side)
CPU Board
(top side)
SW1
CN3
(HDD)
HDD
Internal
modem
SW2
ALM
SWAP
HDD
APL
BIOS
CN7 (COM1)
CN8 (COM2)
CN14 (MONI)
CN9 (PARA)
LINK
100M
CN10 (To LAN)
FAN
CN11 (USB)
CN12 (PS/2)
SW4
CN15 (FAN)
SW3
CN6 (DSP Board)
NOTE:
HDD is a local content product.
597
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-VM03-M (VM03)
DSP Board (Bottom Side)
DSP Board
(bottom side)
BL7 (15)
BL0 (8)
SWP
SW5
APP
DSP
CN18
LD7 (15)
LD0 (8)
CN17
SW6
CN17 (CPU Board)
CN18 : To CN20 connector on PZ-VM05/PZ-VM06 card
598
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-VM03-M (VM03)
Lamp Indications
CPU Board
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
ALM
Red
Flashes when this card is operating normally.
HDD
Green
Flashes when loading BIOS bootstrap programs (When this card is

starting up), and when accessing the internal HDD.
BIOS
Green
Lights when BIOS program starts and goes out when OS program
starts.
SWAP
Red
Lights when OS is shut down.
APL
Green/Red
According to voice mail application software.
LINK
Green
Lights when LAN link pulse is detected.

Flashes when LAN data is transferred and received.
100M
Green
Indicates LAN is connected in 100 Mbps.
DSP Board
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0-BL7
Red
Lights when the corresponding circuit is in use.

Blink when corresponding circuit is in make busy state or the system
data for the circuit is not assigned.
SWAP
Green/Red
Lights when OS is shut down. VMS system including PC section can

be unplugged while this LED lights.
APP
Green/Red
Lights or flashes according to the VMS application program.
DSP
Red
Lights when OS is downloaded.
LD0-LD7
Red
Lights when the corresponding DSP port is used.
599
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-VM03-M (VM03)
Switch Settings
CPU Board
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
(Rotary SW)
FUNCTION
Reset of the VM03 card
Power ON of the VM03 card
CHECK
0-F
2-E
SW2
(Push SW)
SW3
(Piano Key SW)
Not used
Push when starting up the VM03 card,
after the SW1 switch is set to 1 and the
SW5 switch is set to DOWN (MB off)
position.
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON
COM2 is used for internal modem

(remote maintenance)
OFF
COM2 is used for RS-232C port (local

direct connection to maintenance console)
OFF
Not used
OFF
2
1
ON
SW4
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
2
1
ON
600
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-VM03-M (VM03)
DSP Board
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW5 (Toggle SW)
UP
DOWN
NOTE
SW6
(Dip SW)
CHECK
For shut-down (MB on)

For normal operation (MB off)
SW
6-1
OFF
SW
6-2
OFF Voice Mail started in
direct mode (When
SW4-1 is set to OFF.)
ON Voice Mail started in
modem mode (When
SW4-1 is set to ON.)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON
1 2 3 4
FUNCTION
OFF

NOTE: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
601
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-VM04 (VM04)
PZ-VM04 (VM04)
DSP Board
(put between VM03)
BL7 (15)
BL0 (8)
CN18
LD7 (15)
LD0 (8)
CN17
CN17 (CPU Board)
CN19
(DSP Board)
CN18 : To CN18 connector on PZ-VM05/PZ-VM06 card
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0-BL7
Red
Lights when the corresponding circuit is in use.

Blink when corresponding circuit is in make busy state or the system
data for the circuit is not assigned.
LD0-LD7
Red
Lights when the corresponding DSP port is used.
Switch Settings
602
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
PZ-VM05 (VM05)/PZ-VM06 (VM06)
PZ-VM05 (VM05)/PZ-VM06 (VM06)

CN20
CN20: To CN18 connector on DSP Board
Lamp Indications
Switch Settings
603
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

009 11298 R14.0 - Installation Procedure Manual

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

009 11298 R14.0 - Installation Procedure Manual

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

A Publication of

NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.

3522 009 11298

Great care has been taken to ensure that the information

NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V. 2007.

PRODUCT DISPOSAL INFORMATION

For countries outside the European Union

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

One touch key

Abbr. NEC Description

Digital Announcement Trunk

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

Announcement without 3rd party hearing it.

A standard related to 911 service

See Commands Manual

ISDN calling party number

Abbr. NEC Description

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

Direct Inward System Access

Digital Line Circuit

(Rotary) Dial Pulse

Differential Services (DiffServ)

Commands Manual - AP00 card

T1/E1 interface to public network

SuperVisor / Operator Console

Direct Dialing Out : setting up external calls

For Dterm assistant software

Desktop Telephone (analog or digital)

American regulation office

Signalling format for ANI.

Abbr. NEC Description

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

Key Feauture (registration)

Key Transfer Facility

Listed Directory Number

Message Center Interface

Phase Locked Oscillator

ISDN primary rate interface trunk

Key systems are operating directly on

Equipment hardware Address : PIM nbr (0 ~

Microphone or its key

OM terminal window, part of MATWorX

Kind of Cluster ID; for originating office

Shelf : comparable with CSM and PM

Property Management System (in hotel

NEC wireless system

Abbr. NEC Description

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

Registration Admission Status

Registration Admission Status

Basic Service Profile ID (ISDN)

Pickup incoming calls in night mode

Line numbers of trunk lines

Basic ACD. Distribution of calls based on

For Wireless system

NEAX 2000 IPS

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION .........................................................................

Floor Standing Installation ................................................................................................

EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION ........................................................................

Module/Installation Hardware ............................................................................................

LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL .................................................................

Circuit Card Mounting Slots ..............................................................................................

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................